S/390: Add support for pgste marker
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset M68HC11
145 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset HPPA
148 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset MIPS
154 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC
157 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset POWERPC64
160 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset S/390
163 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset SPU
166 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset TICOFF
169 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset WIN32
172 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173 @end ifset
174 @ifset XTENSA
175 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176 @end ifset
177 @end ifclear
178 @ifclear SingleFormat
179 * BFD:: BFD
180 @end ifclear
181 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
185 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
186 * LD Index:: LD Index
187 @end menu
188 @end ifnottex
189
190 @node Overview
191 @chapter Overview
192
193 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194 @cindex what is this?
195
196 @ifset man
197 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
198 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
199 @c man end
200
201 @c man begin SEEALSO
202 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204 @file{ld}.
205 @c man end
206 @end ifset
207
208 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
210 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
211 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
212 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
213
214 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
215 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
218 @ifset man
219 @c For the man only
220 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
221 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
223 @end ifset
224
225 @ifclear SingleFormat
226 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
228 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231 @end ifclear
232
233 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
236 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
237 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
239 @c man end
240
241 @node Invocation
242 @chapter Invocation
243
244 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
246 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
247 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248 you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
250 @c man end
251
252 @ifset UsesEnvVars
253 @menu
254 * Options:: Command Line Options
255 * Environment:: Environment Variables
256 @end menu
257
258 @node Options
259 @section Command Line Options
260 @end ifset
261
262 @cindex command line
263 @cindex options
264
265 @c man begin OPTIONS
266
267 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269 @cindex standard Unix system
270 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
271 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272 link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274 @smallexample
275 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276 @end smallexample
277
278 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
279 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
283 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
284 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
289 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291 noted in the descriptions below.
292
293 @cindex object files
294 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297 an option and its argument.
298
299 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303 message @samp{No input files}.
304
305 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
306 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
311 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
316
317 For options whose names are a single letter,
318 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320 option that requires them.
321
322 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
323 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
324 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
325 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
326 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
327 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329 output.
330
331 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336 accepted.
337
338 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
340 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341 compiler driver) like this:
342
343 @smallexample
344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
345 @end smallexample
346
347 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
348 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355 @smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357 @end smallexample
358
359 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360 linker:
361
362 @table @gcctabopt
363 @include at-file.texi
364
365 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
366 @item -a @var{keyword}
367 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
373 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
380 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
381 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
382 interface.
383
384 @ifset I960
385 @cindex architectures
386 @kindex -A @var{arch}
387 @item -A @var{architecture}
388 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
390 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
392 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
394 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
395 family}, for details.
396
397 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
398 other architecture families.
399 @end ifset
400
401 @ifclear SingleFormat
402 @cindex binary input format
403 @kindex -b @var{format}
404 @kindex --format=@var{format}
405 @cindex input format
406 @cindex input format
407 @item -b @var{input-format}
408 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
409 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
411 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
412 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
413 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
414 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
415 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419 @xref{BFD}.
420
421 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423 linking object files of different formats), by including
424 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
425 particular format.
426
427 The default format is taken from the environment variable
428 @code{GNUTARGET}.
429 @ifset UsesEnvVars
430 @xref{Environment}.
431 @end ifset
432 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
433 @code{TARGET};
434 @ifclear man
435 see @ref{Format Commands}.
436 @end ifclear
437 @end ifclear
438
439 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441 @cindex compatibility, MRI
442 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
444 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
445 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
446 @ifclear man
447 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448 @end ifclear
449 @ifset man
450 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451 @end ifset
452 Introduce MRI script files with
453 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
454 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
456 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458 @cindex common allocation
459 @kindex -d
460 @kindex -dc
461 @kindex -dp
462 @item -d
463 @itemx -dc
464 @itemx -dp
465 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
471 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
480 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
481
482 @cindex entry point, from command line
483 @kindex -e @var{entry}
484 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
485 @item -e @var{entry}
486 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
495 @kindex --exclude-libs
496 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
498 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
499 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504 be treated as hidden.
505
506 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517 regardless of this option.
518
519 @cindex dynamic symbol table
520 @kindex -E
521 @kindex --export-dynamic
522 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
523 @item -E
524 @itemx --export-dynamic
525 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
526 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
535
536 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539 linking the program itself.
540
541 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
542 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
543 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
544
545 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
549 @ifclear SingleFormat
550 @cindex big-endian objects
551 @cindex endianness
552 @kindex -EB
553 @item -EB
554 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556 @cindex little-endian objects
557 @kindex -EL
558 @item -EL
559 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
560 @end ifclear
561
562 @kindex -f @var{name}
563 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564 @item -f @var{name}
565 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
566 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579 machine specific performance.
580
581 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
584 @kindex -F @var{name}
585 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
586 @item -F @var{name}
587 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
588 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599 @var{name}.
600
601 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
602 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
603 object files.
604 @ifclear SingleFormat
605 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
606 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
607 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
608 environment variable.
609 @end ifclear
610 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611 creating an ELF shared object.
612
613 @cindex finalization function
614 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
615 @item -fini=@var{name}
616 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619 the function to call.
620
621 @kindex -g
622 @item -g
623 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
625 @kindex -G @var{value}
626 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
627 @cindex object size
628 @item -G @var{value}
629 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
632 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
633 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635 @cindex runtime library name
636 @kindex -h @var{name}
637 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
638 @item -h @var{name}
639 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
640 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646 @kindex -i
647 @cindex incremental link
648 @item -i
649 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
651 @cindex initialization function
652 @kindex -init=@var{name}
653 @item -init=@var{name}
654 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657 function to call.
658
659 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
660 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
661 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
662 @item -l @var{namespec}
663 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
667 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
668 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
669
670 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
671 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677 @var{filename}.
678
679 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
686 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
687 archives multiple times.
688
689 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691 @ifset GENERIC
692 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
693 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
694 behaviour of the AIX linker.
695 @end ifset
696
697 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
698 @kindex -L @var{dir}
699 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
700 @item -L @var{searchdir}
701 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
702 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
704 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
707 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
708 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710 option is specified.
711
712 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
715
716 @ifset UsesEnvVars
717 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
718 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
719 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720 @end ifset
721
722 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726 @cindex emulation
727 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
728 @item -m @var{emulation}
729 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736 configured.
737
738 @cindex link map
739 @kindex -M
740 @kindex --print-map
741 @item -M
742 @itemx --print-map
743 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744 information about the link, including the following:
745
746 @itemize @bullet
747 @item
748 Where object files are mapped into memory.
749 @item
750 How common symbols are allocated.
751 @item
752 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
754 @item
755 The values assigned to symbols.
756
757 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763 linker script containing:
764
765 @smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769 @end smallexample
770
771 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772 option is used:
773
774 @smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778 @end smallexample
779
780 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781 scripts.
782 @end itemize
783
784 @kindex -n
785 @cindex read-only text
786 @cindex NMAGIC
787 @kindex --nmagic
788 @item -n
789 @itemx --nmagic
790 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
793
794 @kindex -N
795 @kindex --omagic
796 @cindex read/write from cmd line
797 @cindex OMAGIC
798 @item -N
799 @itemx --omagic
800 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
801 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805 specification published by Microsoft.
806
807 @kindex --no-omagic
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item --no-omagic
810 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
814
815 @kindex -o @var{output}
816 @kindex --output=@var{output}
817 @cindex naming the output file
818 @item -o @var{output}
819 @itemx --output=@var{output}
820 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
821 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824 @kindex -O @var{level}
825 @cindex generating optimized output
826 @item -O @var{level}
827 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
828 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
829 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
834
835 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
836 @item -plugin @var{name}
837 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841 wish.
842
843 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
849 just copy in the newest one.
850
851 @kindex --push-state
852 @cindex push state governing input file handling
853 @item --push-state
854 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868 something as follows:
869
870 @smallexample
871 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872 @end smallexample
873
874 @kindex --pop-state
875 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
876 @item --pop-state
877 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878 flags governing input file handling.
879
880 @kindex -q
881 @kindex --emit-relocs
882 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
883 @item -q
884 @itemx --emit-relocs
885 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
886 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888 in larger executables.
889
890 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
892 @kindex --force-dynamic
893 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894 @item --force-dynamic
895 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896 to VxWorks targets.
897
898 @cindex partial link
899 @cindex relocatable output
900 @kindex -r
901 @kindex --relocatable
902 @item -r
903 @itemx --relocatable
904 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
905 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
906 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908 @code{OMAGIC}.
909 @c ; see @option{-N}.
910 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
914 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918 with input files in other formats at all.
919
920 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922 @kindex -R @var{file}
923 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924 @cindex symbol-only input
925 @item -R @var{filename}
926 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930 programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
932 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
933 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
934 the @option{-rpath} option.
935
936 @kindex -s
937 @kindex --strip-all
938 @cindex strip all symbols
939 @item -s
940 @itemx --strip-all
941 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943 @kindex -S
944 @kindex --strip-debug
945 @cindex strip debugger symbols
946 @item -S
947 @itemx --strip-debug
948 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
950 @kindex --strip-discarded
951 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
952 @item --strip-discarded
953 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
954 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955 Enabled by default.
956
957 @kindex -t
958 @kindex --trace
959 @cindex input files, displaying
960 @item -t
961 @itemx --trace
962 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
963
964 @kindex -T @var{script}
965 @kindex --script=@var{script}
966 @cindex script files
967 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
968 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
970 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
971 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
972 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975 options accumulate.
976
977 @kindex -dT @var{script}
978 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979 @cindex script files
980 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991 @samp{gcc}).
992
993 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
994 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995 @cindex undefined symbol
996 @item -u @var{symbol}
997 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
1004 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007 instead.
1008
1009 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex symbols, require defined
1011 @cindex defined symbol
1012 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
1020 @kindex -Ur
1021 @cindex constructors
1022 @item -Ur
1023 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1025 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1026 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030 @samp{-r} for the others.
1031
1032 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033 @cindex orphan sections
1034 @cindex sections, orphan
1035 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041 @table @code
1042 @item place
1043 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1045 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1046
1047 @item discard
1048 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051 @item warn
1052 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053 issue a warning.
1054
1055 @item error
1056 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057 @end table
1058
1059 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
1061 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069 in a linker script.
1070
1071 @kindex -v
1072 @kindex -V
1073 @kindex --version
1074 @cindex version
1075 @item -v
1076 @itemx --version
1077 @itemx -V
1078 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1079 lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081 @kindex -x
1082 @kindex --discard-all
1083 @cindex deleting local symbols
1084 @item -x
1085 @itemx --discard-all
1086 Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088 @kindex -X
1089 @kindex --discard-locals
1090 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1091 @item -X
1092 @itemx --discard-locals
1093 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1096
1097 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099 @cindex symbol tracing
1100 @item -y @var{symbol}
1101 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104 to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1110 @item -Y @var{path}
1111 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112 for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115 @item -z @var{keyword}
1116 The recognized keywords are:
1117 @table @samp
1118
1119 @item combreloc
1120 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1121 lookup caching possible.
1122
1123 @item common
1124 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1125 link.
1126
1127 @item defs
1128 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1129 shared libraries are still allowed.
1130
1131 @item execstack
1132 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1133
1134 @item global
1135 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1136 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1137 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1138
1139 @item initfirst
1140 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1141 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1142 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1143 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1144 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1145 objects.
1146
1147 @item interpose
1148 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1149 but the primary executable.
1150
1151 @item lazy
1152 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1153 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1154 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1155 Lazy binding is the default.
1156
1157 @item loadfltr
1158 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1159 runtime.
1160
1161 @item muldefs
1162 Allows multiple definitions.
1163
1164 @item nocombreloc
1165 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1166
1167 @item nocommon
1168 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1169 link.
1170
1171 @item nocopyreloc
1172 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1173 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1174
1175 @item nodefaultlib
1176 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1177 ignore any default library search paths.
1178
1179 @item nodelete
1180 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1181
1182 @item nodlopen
1183 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1184
1185 @item nodump
1186 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1187
1188 @item noexecstack
1189 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1190
1191 @item text
1192 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1193
1194 @item notext
1195 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1196
1197 @item textoff
1198 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1199
1200 @item norelro
1201 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1202
1203 @item now
1204 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1205 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1206 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1207 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1208 first called.
1209
1210 @item origin
1211 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1212
1213 @item relro
1214 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1215
1216 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1217 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1218
1219 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1220 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1221
1222 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1223 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1224 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1225 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1226
1227 @item bndplt
1228 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1229
1230 @item noextern-protected-data
1231 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1232 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1233 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1234 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1235 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1236 i386 and x86-64.
1237
1238 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1239 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1240 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1241 by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1242 option.
1243
1244 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1245 Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1246 object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1247 @option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1248 are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1249 make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
1250
1251 @item noreloc-overflow
1252 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1253 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1254 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1255
1256 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1257 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1258 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1259 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1260 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1261 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1262 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1263 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1264 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1265 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1266 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1267
1268 @item ibtplt
1269 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1270 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1271
1272 @item IBT
1273 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1274 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1275 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1276
1277 @item shstk
1278 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1279 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1280 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1281
1282 @end table
1283
1284 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1285
1286 @kindex -(
1287 @cindex groups of archives
1288 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1289 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1290 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1291 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1292
1293 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1294 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1295 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1296 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1297 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1298 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1299 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1300 resolved.
1301
1302 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1303 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1304 more archives.
1305
1306 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1307 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1308 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1309 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1310 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1311 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1312 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1313 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1314 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1315 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1316 restore the old behaviour.
1317
1318 @kindex --as-needed
1319 @kindex --no-as-needed
1320 @item --as-needed
1321 @itemx --no-as-needed
1322 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1323 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1324 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1325 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1326 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1327 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1328 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1329 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1330 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1331 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1332 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1333 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1334 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1335
1336 @kindex --add-needed
1337 @kindex --no-add-needed
1338 @item --add-needed
1339 @itemx --no-add-needed
1340 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1341 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1342 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1343 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1344
1345 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1346 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1347 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1348
1349 @kindex -Bdynamic
1350 @kindex -dy
1351 @kindex -call_shared
1352 @item -Bdynamic
1353 @itemx -dy
1354 @itemx -call_shared
1355 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1356 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1357 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1358 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1359 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1360 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1361
1362 @kindex -Bgroup
1363 @item -Bgroup
1364 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1365 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1366 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1367 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1368 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1369
1370 @kindex -Bstatic
1371 @kindex -dn
1372 @kindex -non_shared
1373 @kindex -static
1374 @item -Bstatic
1375 @itemx -dn
1376 @itemx -non_shared
1377 @itemx -static
1378 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1379 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1380 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1381 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1382 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1383 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1384 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1385 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1386 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1387 libraries.
1388
1389 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1390 @item -Bsymbolic
1391 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1392 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1393 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1394 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1395 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1396 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1397 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1398 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1399
1400 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1401 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1402 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1403 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1404 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1405 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1406 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1407 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1408 libraries and position independent executables.
1409
1410 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1411 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1412 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1413 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1414 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1415 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1416 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1417 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1418 which support shared libraries.
1419
1420 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1421 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1422
1423 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1424 @item --dynamic-list-data
1425 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1426
1427 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1428 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1429 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1430 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1431
1432 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1433 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1434 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1435
1436 @kindex --check-sections
1437 @kindex --no-check-sections
1438 @item --check-sections
1439 @itemx --no-check-sections
1440 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1441 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1442 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1443 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1444 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1445 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1446 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1447 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1448 option.
1449
1450 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1451 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1452 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1453 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1454 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1455 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1456 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1457 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1458 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1459 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1460 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1461 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1462
1463 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1464 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1465 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1466 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1467 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1468 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1469 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1470 symbols.
1471
1472 @cindex cross reference table
1473 @kindex --cref
1474 @item --cref
1475 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1476 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1477 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1478
1479 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1480 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1481 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1482 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1483 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1484 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1485 symbol are listed.
1486
1487 @cindex common allocation
1488 @kindex --no-define-common
1489 @item --no-define-common
1490 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1491 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1492 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1493
1494 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1495 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1496 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1497 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1498 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1499 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1500 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1501 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1502 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1503 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1504
1505 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1506 @cindex section groups
1507 @cindex COMDAT
1508 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1509 @item --force-group-allocation
1510 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1511 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1512 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1513 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1514 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1515 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1516
1517 @cindex symbols, from command line
1518 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1519 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1520 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1521 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1522 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1523 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1524 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1525 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1526 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1527 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1528 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1529 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1530
1531 @cindex demangling, from command line
1532 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1533 @kindex --no-demangle
1534 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1535 @itemx --no-demangle
1536 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1537 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1538 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1539 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1540 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1541 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1542 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1543 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1544 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1545
1546 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1547 @kindex -I@var{file}
1548 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1549 @item -I@var{file}
1550 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1551 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1552 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1553 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1554 doing.
1555
1556 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1557 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1558 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1559 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1560 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1561 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1562
1563 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1564 @item --embedded-relocs
1565 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1566 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1567 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1568 targets.
1569
1570 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1571 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1572 @item --fatal-warnings
1573 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1576
1577 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578 @item --force-exe-suffix
1579 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1580
1581 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1587
1588 @kindex --gc-sections
1589 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1590 @cindex garbage collection
1591 @item --gc-sections
1592 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1593 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1594 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1595 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1596 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1599
1600 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1608 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1609
1610 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1611 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1612 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1613 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1614
1615 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1616 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1617 @cindex garbage collection
1618 @item --print-gc-sections
1619 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1620 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1621 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1622 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1623 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1624 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1625 line.
1626
1627 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1628 @cindex garbage collection
1629 @item --gc-keep-exported
1630 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1631 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1632 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1633 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1634 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1635 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1636 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1637 ELF format targets.
1638
1639 @kindex --print-output-format
1640 @cindex output format
1641 @item --print-output-format
1642 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1643 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1644 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1645
1646 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1647 @cindex memory usage
1648 @item --print-memory-usage
1649 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1650 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1651 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1652 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1653 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1654
1655 @smallexample
1656 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1657 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1658 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1659 @end smallexample
1660
1661 @cindex help
1662 @cindex usage
1663 @kindex --help
1664 @item --help
1665 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1666
1667 @kindex --target-help
1668 @item --target-help
1669 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1670
1671 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1672 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1673 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1674 @option{-M} option, above.
1675
1676 @cindex memory usage
1677 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1678 @item --no-keep-memory
1679 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1680 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1681 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1682 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1683 while linking a large executable.
1684
1685 @kindex --no-undefined
1686 @kindex -z defs
1687 @item --no-undefined
1688 @itemx -z defs
1689 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1690 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1691 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1692 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1693 libraries being linked in.
1694
1695 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1696 @kindex -z muldefs
1697 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1698 @itemx -z muldefs
1699 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1700 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1701 first definition will be used.
1702
1703 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1704 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1705 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1706 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1707 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1708 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1709 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1710 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1711 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1712
1713 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1714 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1715 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1716 a shared library.
1717
1718 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1719 libraries specified at link time are that:
1720
1721 @itemize @bullet
1722 @item
1723 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1724 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1725 resolvable at load time.
1726 @item
1727 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1728 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1729
1730 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1731 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1732 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1733 appropriate memset function.
1734 @end itemize
1735
1736 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1737 @item --no-undefined-version
1738 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1739 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1740 will be issued instead.
1741
1742 @kindex --default-symver
1743 @item --default-symver
1744 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1745 exported symbols.
1746
1747 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1748 @item --default-imported-symver
1749 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1750 imported symbols.
1751
1752 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1753 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1754 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1755 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1756 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1757 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1758 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1759 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1760 inappropriate.
1761
1762 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1763 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1764 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1765 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1766
1767 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1768 @item --no-whole-archive
1769 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1770 archive files.
1771
1772 @cindex output file after errors
1773 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1774 @item --noinhibit-exec
1775 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1776 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1777 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1778 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1779
1780 @kindex -nostdlib
1781 @item -nostdlib
1782 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1783 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1784 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1785
1786 @ifclear SingleFormat
1787 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1788 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1789 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1790 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1791 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1792 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1793 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1794 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1795 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1796 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1797 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1798 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1799 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1800 @end ifclear
1801
1802 @kindex --out-implib
1803 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1804 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1805 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1806 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1807 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1808 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1809 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1810 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1811
1812 @kindex -pie
1813 @kindex --pic-executable
1814 @item -pie
1815 @itemx --pic-executable
1816 @cindex position independent executables
1817 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1818 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1819 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1820 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1821 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1822 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1823
1824 @kindex -qmagic
1825 @item -qmagic
1826 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1827
1828 @kindex -Qy
1829 @item -Qy
1830 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1831
1832 @kindex --relax
1833 @cindex synthesizing linker
1834 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1835 @cindex --no-relax
1836 @item --relax
1837 @itemx --no-relax
1838 An option with machine dependent effects.
1839 @ifset GENERIC
1840 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1841 @end ifset
1842 @ifset H8300
1843 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1844 @end ifset
1845 @ifset I960
1846 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1847 @end ifset
1848 @ifset XTENSA
1849 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1850 @end ifset
1851 @ifset M68HC11
1852 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1853 @end ifset
1854 @ifset NIOSII
1855 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1856 @end ifset
1857 @ifset POWERPC
1858 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1859 @end ifset
1860
1861 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1862 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1863 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1864 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1865 instructions, and combining constant values.
1866
1867 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1868 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1869 @ifset GENERIC
1870 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1871 family of processors.
1872 @end ifset
1873
1874 @ifset GENERIC
1875 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1876 but ignored.
1877 @end ifset
1878
1879 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1880 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1881
1882 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1883 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1884 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1885 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1886 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1887 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1888 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1889 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1890 @ifset GENERIC
1891 (such as VxWorks)
1892 @end ifset
1893 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1894 run-time memory.
1895
1896 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1897 or symbols needed for relocations.
1898
1899 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1900 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1901
1902 @ifset GENERIC
1903 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1904 @cindex runtime library search path
1905 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1906 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1907 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1908 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1909 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1910 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1911 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1912 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1913 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1914 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1915
1916 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1917 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1918 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1919 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1920 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1921 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1922 file systems.
1923
1924 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1925 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1926 the @option{-rpath} option.
1927 @end ifset
1928
1929 @ifset GENERIC
1930 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1931 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1932 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1933 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1934 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1935 of the input files.
1936
1937 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1938 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1939 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1940 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1941 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1942 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1943 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1944 appearing multiple times.
1945
1946 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1947 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1948 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1949 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1950 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1951
1952 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1953 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1954 supported.
1955
1956 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1957 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1958 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1959 runtime linker would do.
1960
1961 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1962 libraries:
1963 @enumerate
1964 @item
1965 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1966 @item
1967 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1968 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1969 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1970 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1971 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1972 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1973 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1974 @item
1975 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1976 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1977 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1978 @item
1979 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1980 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1981 @item
1982 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1983 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1984 @item
1985 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1986 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1987 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1988 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1989 @item
1990 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1991 @item
1992 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1993 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1994 @end enumerate
1995
1996 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1997 warning and continue with the link.
1998 @end ifset
1999
2000 @kindex -shared
2001 @kindex -Bshareable
2002 @item -shared
2003 @itemx -Bshareable
2004 @cindex shared libraries
2005 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2006 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2007 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2008 undefined symbols in the link.
2009
2010 @kindex --sort-common
2011 @item --sort-common
2012 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2013 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2014 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2015 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2016 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2017 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2018 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2019 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2020
2021 @kindex --sort-section=name
2022 @item --sort-section=name
2023 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2024 patterns in the linker script.
2025
2026 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2027 @item --sort-section=alignment
2028 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2029 patterns in the linker script.
2030
2031 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2032 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2033 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2034 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2035 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2036
2037 @kindex --split-by-file
2038 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2039 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2040 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2041 size of 1 if not given.
2042
2043 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2044 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2045 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2046 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2047 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2048 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2049 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2050 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2051 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2052 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2053 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2054 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2055
2056 @kindex --stats
2057 @item --stats
2058 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2059 as execution time and memory usage.
2060
2061 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2062 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2063 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2064 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2065 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2066
2067 @kindex --task-link
2068 @item --task-link
2069 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2070 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2071
2072 @kindex --traditional-format
2073 @cindex traditional format
2074 @item --traditional-format
2075 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2076 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2077 use the traditional format instead.
2078
2079 @cindex dbx
2080 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2081 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2082 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2083 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2084 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2085 combine duplicate entries.
2086
2087 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2088 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2089 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2090 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2091 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2092 line.
2093 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2094 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2095 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2096 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2097 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2098
2099 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2100 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2101 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2102 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2103 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2104 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2105 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2106 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2107 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2108
2109 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2110 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2111 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2112 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2113 byte of the text segment.
2114
2115 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2117 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2118 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2119 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2120 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2121
2122 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2124 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2125 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2126 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2127
2128 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2129 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2130 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2131 values for @samp{method}:
2132
2133 @table @samp
2134 @item ignore-all
2135 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2136
2137 @item report-all
2138 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2139
2140 @item ignore-in-object-files
2141 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2142 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2143
2144 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2145 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2146 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2147 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2148 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2149 command line.
2150 @end table
2151
2152 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2153 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2154
2155 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2156 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2157 can change this to a warning.
2158
2159 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2160 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2161 @item --dll-verbose
2162 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2163 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2164 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2165 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2166 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2167
2168 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2169 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2170 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2171 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2172 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2173 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2174 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2175 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2176 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2177 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2178 @xref{WIN32}.
2179
2180 @kindex --warn-common
2181 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2182 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2183 @item --warn-common
2184 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2185 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2186 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2187 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2188 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2189 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2190
2191 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2192
2193 @table @samp
2194 @item int i = 1;
2195 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2196 file.
2197
2198 @item extern int i;
2199 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2200 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2201 variable somewhere.
2202
2203 @item int i;
2204 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2205 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2206 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2207 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2208 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2209 a definition of the same variable.
2210 @end table
2211
2212 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2213 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2214 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2215 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2216 a common symbol.
2217
2218 @enumerate
2219 @item
2220 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2221 definition for the symbol.
2222 @smallexample
2223 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2224 overridden by definition
2225 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2226 @end smallexample
2227
2228 @item
2229 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2230 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2231 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2232 @smallexample
2233 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2234 overriding common
2235 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2236 @end smallexample
2237
2238 @item
2239 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2240 @smallexample
2241 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2242 of `@var{symbol}'
2243 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2244 @end smallexample
2245
2246 @item
2247 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2248 @smallexample
2249 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2250 overridden by larger common
2251 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2252 @end smallexample
2253
2254 @item
2255 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2256 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2257 encountered in a different order.
2258 @smallexample
2259 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2260 overriding smaller common
2261 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2262 @end smallexample
2263 @end enumerate
2264
2265 @kindex --warn-constructors
2266 @item --warn-constructors
2267 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2268 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2269 detect the use of global constructors.
2270
2271 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2272 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2273 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2274 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2275 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2276 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2277 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2278 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2279 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2280 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2281 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2282 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2283 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2284
2285 @kindex --warn-once
2286 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2287 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2288 @item --warn-once
2289 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2290 which refers to it.
2291
2292 @kindex --warn-section-align
2293 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2294 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2295 @item --warn-section-align
2296 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2297 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2298 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2299 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2300 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2301
2302 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2303 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2304 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2305
2306 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2307 @item --warn-alternate-em
2308 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2309
2310 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2312 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2313 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2314 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2315
2316 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2317 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2318 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2319 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2320
2321 @kindex --whole-archive
2322 @cindex including an entire archive
2323 @item --whole-archive
2324 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2325 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2326 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2327 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2328 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2329 library. This option may be used more than once.
2330
2331 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2332 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2333 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2334 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2335 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2336
2337 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2338 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2339 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2340 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2341 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2342 @var{symbol}.
2343
2344 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2345 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2346 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2347 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2348
2349 Here is a trivial example:
2350
2351 @smallexample
2352 void *
2353 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2354 @{
2355 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2356 return __real_malloc (c);
2357 @}
2358 @end smallexample
2359
2360 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2361 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2362 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2363 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2364
2365 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2366 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2367 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2368 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2369 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2370
2371 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2372 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2373 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2374 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2375 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2376 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2377 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2378
2379 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2380 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2381 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2382 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2383 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2384
2385 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2386 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2387 @item --enable-new-dtags
2388 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2389 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2390 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2391 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2392 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2393 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2394 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2395 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2396
2397 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2398 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2399 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2400 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2401 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2402 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2403 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2404
2405 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2406 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2407 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2408 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2409 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2410 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2411 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2412
2413 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2414 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2415 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2416 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2417 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2418 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2419 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2420 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2421 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2422 compressed using zlib.
2423
2424 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2425 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2426 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2427 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2428 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2429 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2430
2431 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2432 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2433
2434 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2435 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2436 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2437 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2438
2439 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2440 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2441 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2442 @option{--help} option.
2443
2444 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2445 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2446 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2447 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2448 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2449 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2450
2451 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2452 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2453 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2454 has been used.
2455
2456 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2457 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2458
2459 @kindex --build-id
2460 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2461 @item --build-id
2462 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2463 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2464 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2465 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2466 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2467 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2468 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2469 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2470 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2471 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2472 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2473
2474 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2475 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2476 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2477 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2478 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2479 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2480
2481 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2482 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2483 @end table
2484
2485 @c man end
2486
2487 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2488
2489 @c man begin OPTIONS
2490
2491 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2492 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2493 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2494 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2495 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2496 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2497 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2498 object file).
2499
2500 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2501 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2502 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2503 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2504
2505 @table @gcctabopt
2506
2507 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2508 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2509 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2510 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2511 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2512
2513 @kindex --base-file
2514 @item --base-file @var{file}
2515 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2516 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2517 @file{dlltool}.
2518 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2519
2520 @kindex --dll
2521 @item --dll
2522 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2523 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2524 file.
2525 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2526
2527 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2528 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2529 @item --enable-long-section-names
2530 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2531 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2532 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2533 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2534 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2535 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2536 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2537 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2538 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2539 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2540 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2541 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2542 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2543 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2544 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2545 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2546 image and not stripping symbols.
2547 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2548
2549 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2550 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2551 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2552 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2553 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2554 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2555 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2556 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2557 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2558 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2559 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2560 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2561 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2562 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2563 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2564 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2565 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2566 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2567
2568 @kindex --leading-underscore
2569 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2570 @item --leading-underscore
2571 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2572 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2573 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2574 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2575
2576 @cindex DLLs, creating
2577 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2578 @item --export-all-symbols
2579 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2580 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2581 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2582 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2583 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2584 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2585 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2586 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2587 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2588 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2589 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2590 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2591 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2592 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2593 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2594 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2595 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2596 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2597 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2598 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2599 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2600 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2601 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2602
2603 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2604 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2605 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2606 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2607 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2608
2609 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2610 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2611 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2612 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2613
2614 @kindex --file-alignment
2615 @item --file-alignment
2616 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2617 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2618 512.
2619 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2620
2621 @cindex heap size
2622 @kindex --heap
2623 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2624 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2625 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2626 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2627 committed.
2628 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2629
2630 @cindex image base
2631 @kindex --image-base
2632 @item --image-base @var{value}
2633 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2634 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2635 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2636 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2637 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2638 for dlls.
2639 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2640
2641 @kindex --kill-at
2642 @item --kill-at
2643 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2644 symbols before they are exported.
2645 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2646
2647 @kindex --large-address-aware
2648 @item --large-address-aware
2649 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2650 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2651 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2652 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2653 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2654 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2655
2656 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2657 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2658 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2659 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2660 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2661 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2662 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2663
2664 @kindex --major-image-version
2665 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2666 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2667 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2668
2669 @kindex --major-os-version
2670 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2671 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2675 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2676 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2677 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2678
2679 @kindex --minor-image-version
2680 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2681 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2682 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2683
2684 @kindex --minor-os-version
2685 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2686 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2687 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2688
2689 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2690 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2691 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2692 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2693
2694 @cindex DEF files, creating
2695 @cindex DLLs, creating
2696 @kindex --output-def
2697 @item --output-def @var{file}
2698 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2699 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2700 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2701 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2702 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2703 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2704
2705 @cindex DLLs, creating
2706 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2707 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2708 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2709 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2710 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2711 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2712 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2713 execution are avoided.
2714 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2715
2716 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2717 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2718 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2719 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2720 default.
2721 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2722
2723 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2724 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2725 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2726 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2727 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2728 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2729 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2730 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2731 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2735 @item --enable-auto-import
2736 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2737 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2738 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2739 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2740 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2741 specification published by Microsoft.
2742
2743 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2744 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2745 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2746 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2747 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2748
2749 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2750 see this message:
2751
2752 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2753 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2754
2755 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2756 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2757 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2758 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2759 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2760 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2761 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2762 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2763 the warning, and exit.
2764
2765 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2766 data type of the exported variable:
2767
2768 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2769 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2770 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2771
2772 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2773 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2774 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2775 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2776
2777 @example
2778 extern type extern_array[];
2779 extern_array[1] -->
2780 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2781 @end example
2782
2783 or
2784
2785 @example
2786 extern type extern_array[];
2787 extern_array[1] -->
2788 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2789 @end example
2790
2791 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2792 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2793
2794 @example
2795 extern struct s extern_struct;
2796 extern_struct.field -->
2797 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2798 @end example
2799
2800 or
2801
2802 @example
2803 extern long long extern_ll;
2804 extern_ll -->
2805 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2806 @end example
2807
2808 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2809 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2810 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2811 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2812 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2813 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2814 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2815 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2816
2817 Original:
2818 @example
2819 --foo.h
2820 extern int arr[];
2821 --foo.c
2822 #include "foo.h"
2823 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2824 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2825 @}
2826 @end example
2827
2828 Solution 1:
2829 @example
2830 --foo.h
2831 extern int arr[];
2832 --foo.c
2833 #include "foo.h"
2834 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2835 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2836 volatile int *parr = arr;
2837 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2838 @}
2839 @end example
2840
2841 Solution 2:
2842 @example
2843 --foo.h
2844 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2845 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2846 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2847 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2848 #else
2849 #define FOO_IMPORT
2850 #endif
2851 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2852 --foo.c
2853 #include "foo.h"
2854 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2855 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2856 @}
2857 @end example
2858
2859 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2860 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2861 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2862 functions).
2863 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2864
2865 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2866 @item --disable-auto-import
2867 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2868 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2869 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2870
2871 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2872 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2873 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2874 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2875 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2876 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2877 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2878
2879 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2880 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2881 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2882 DLLs.
2883 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2884
2885 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2886 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2887 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2888 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2889
2890 @kindex --section-alignment
2891 @item --section-alignment
2892 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2893 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2894 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2895
2896 @cindex stack size
2897 @kindex --stack
2898 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2899 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2900 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2901 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2902 committed.
2903 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2904
2905 @kindex --subsystem
2906 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2907 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2908 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2909 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2910 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2911 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2912 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2913 @var{which}.
2914 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2915
2916 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2917 of the PE file header:
2918 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2919
2920 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2921 @item --high-entropy-va
2922 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2923 (ASLR).
2924
2925 @kindex --dynamicbase
2926 @item --dynamicbase
2927 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2928 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2929 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2930
2931 @kindex --forceinteg
2932 @item --forceinteg
2933 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2934
2935 @kindex --nxcompat
2936 @item --nxcompat
2937 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2938 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2939
2940 @kindex --no-isolation
2941 @item --no-isolation
2942 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2943
2944 @kindex --no-seh
2945 @item --no-seh
2946 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2947 this image.
2948
2949 @kindex --no-bind
2950 @item --no-bind
2951 Do not bind this image.
2952
2953 @kindex --wdmdriver
2954 @item --wdmdriver
2955 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2956
2957 @kindex --tsaware
2958 @item --tsaware
2959 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2960
2961 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2962 @item --insert-timestamp
2963 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2964 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2965 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2966 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2967 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2968 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2969 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2970 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2971 identically.
2972 @end table
2973
2974 @c man end
2975
2976 @ifset C6X
2977 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2978
2979 @c man begin OPTIONS
2980
2981 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2982 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2983 all executables use an index of 0.
2984
2985 @table @gcctabopt
2986
2987 @kindex --dsbt-size
2988 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2989 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2990 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2991 entries.
2992
2993 @kindex --dsbt-index
2994 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2995 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2996 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2997 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2998 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2999
3000 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3001 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3002 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3003
3004 @end table
3005
3006 @c man end
3007 @end ifset
3008
3009 @ifset M68HC11
3010 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3011
3012 @c man begin OPTIONS
3013
3014 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3015 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3016
3017 @table @gcctabopt
3018
3019 @kindex --no-trampoline
3020 @item --no-trampoline
3021 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3022 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3023 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3024
3025 @kindex --bank-window
3026 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3027 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3028 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3029 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3030 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3031
3032 @end table
3033
3034 @c man end
3035 @end ifset
3036
3037 @ifset M68K
3038 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3039
3040 @c man begin OPTIONS
3041
3042 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3043 when linking for 68K targets.
3044
3045 @table @gcctabopt
3046
3047 @kindex --got
3048 @item --got=@var{type}
3049 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3050 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3051 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3052 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3053
3054 @end table
3055
3056 @c man end
3057 @end ifset
3058
3059 @ifset MIPS
3060 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3061
3062 @c man begin OPTIONS
3063
3064 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3065 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3066 linking for MIPS targets.
3067
3068 @table @gcctabopt
3069
3070 @kindex --insn32
3071 @item --insn32
3072 @kindex --no-insn32
3073 @itemx --no-insn32
3074 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3075 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3076 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3077 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3078 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3079 possible.
3080
3081 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3082 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3083 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3084 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3085 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3086 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3087 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3088 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3089 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3090 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3091 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3092 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3093 an error.
3094
3095 @end table
3096
3097 @c man end
3098 @end ifset
3099
3100 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3101 @node Environment
3102 @section Environment Variables
3103
3104 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3105
3106 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3107 @ifclear SingleFormat
3108 @code{GNUTARGET},
3109 @end ifclear
3110 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3111
3112 @ifclear SingleFormat
3113 @kindex GNUTARGET
3114 @cindex default input format
3115 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3116 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3117 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3118 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3119 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3120 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3121 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3122 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3123 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3124 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3125 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3126 @end ifclear
3127
3128 @kindex LDEMULATION
3129 @cindex default emulation
3130 @cindex emulation, default
3131 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3132 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3133 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3134 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3135 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3136 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3137 linker was configured.
3138
3139 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3140 @cindex demangling, default
3141 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3142 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3143 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3144 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3145 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3146 options.
3147
3148 @c man end
3149 @end ifset
3150
3151 @node Scripts
3152 @chapter Linker Scripts
3153
3154 @cindex scripts
3155 @cindex linker scripts
3156 @cindex command files
3157 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3158 written in the linker command language.
3159
3160 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3161 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3162 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3163 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3164 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3165 described below.
3166
3167 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3168 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3169 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3170 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3171 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3172
3173 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3174 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3175 default linker script.
3176
3177 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3178 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3179 Linker Scripts}.
3180
3181 @menu
3182 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3183 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3184 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3185 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3186 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3187 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3188 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3189 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3190 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3191 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3192 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3193 @end menu
3194
3195 @node Basic Script Concepts
3196 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3197 @cindex linker script concepts
3198 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3199 describe the linker script language.
3200
3201 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3202 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3203 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3204 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3205 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3206 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3207 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3208 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3209
3210 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3211 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3212 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3213 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3214 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3215 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3216 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3217 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3218 of debugging information.
3219
3220 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3221 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3222 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3223 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3224 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3225 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3226 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3227 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3228 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3229 RAM address would be the VMA.
3230
3231 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3232 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3233
3234 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3235 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3236 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3237 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3238 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3239 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3240 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3241
3242 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3243 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3244 option.
3245
3246 @node Script Format
3247 @section Linker Script Format
3248 @cindex linker script format
3249 Linker scripts are text files.
3250
3251 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3252 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3253 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3254 generally ignored.
3255
3256 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3257 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3258 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3259 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3260 file name.
3261
3262 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3263 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3264 to whitespace.
3265
3266 @node Simple Example
3267 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3268 @cindex linker script example
3269 @cindex example of linker script
3270 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3271
3272 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3273 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3274 memory layout of the output file.
3275
3276 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3277 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3278 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3279 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3280 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3281 your input files.
3282
3283 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3284 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3285 linker script which will do that:
3286 @smallexample
3287 SECTIONS
3288 @{
3289 . = 0x10000;
3290 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3291 . = 0x8000000;
3292 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3293 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3294 @}
3295 @end smallexample
3296
3297 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3298 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3299 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3300
3301 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3302 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3303 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3304 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3305 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3306 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3307 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3308
3309 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3310 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3311 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3312 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3313 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3314 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3315
3316 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3317 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3318 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3319
3320 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3321 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3322 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3323 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3324 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3325 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3326 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3327
3328 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3329 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3330 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3331 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3332 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3333 sections.
3334
3335 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3336
3337 @node Simple Commands
3338 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3339 @cindex linker script simple commands
3340 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3341
3342 @menu
3343 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3344 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3345 @ifclear SingleFormat
3346 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3347 @end ifclear
3348
3349 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3350 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3351 @end menu
3352
3353 @node Entry Point
3354 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3355 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3356 @cindex start of execution
3357 @cindex first instruction
3358 @cindex entry point
3359 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3360 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3361 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3362 @smallexample
3363 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3364 @end smallexample
3365
3366 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3367 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3368 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3369 @itemize @bullet
3370 @item
3371 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3372 @item
3373 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3374 @item
3375 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3376 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3377 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3378 @item
3379 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3380 @item
3381 The address @code{0}.
3382 @end itemize
3383
3384 @node File Commands
3385 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3386 @cindex linker script file commands
3387 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3388
3389 @table @code
3390 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3391 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3392 @cindex including a linker script
3393 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3394 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3395 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3396 10 levels deep.
3397
3398 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3399 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3400
3401 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3402 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3403 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3404 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3405 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3406 @cindex linker script input object files
3407 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3408 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3409
3410 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3411 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3412 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3413
3414 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3415 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3416
3417 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3418 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3419 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3420 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3421 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3422 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3423 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3424 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3425 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3426 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3427
3428 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3429 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3430 @samp{-l}.
3431
3432 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3433 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3434 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3435
3436 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3437 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3438 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3439 @cindex grouping input files
3440 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3441 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3442 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3443 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3444
3445 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3446 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3447 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3448 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3449 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3450 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3451 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3452 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3453 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3454 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3455 setting afterwards.
3456
3457 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3458 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3459 @cindex output file name in linker script
3460 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3461 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3462 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3463 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3464 precedence.
3465
3466 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3467 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3468
3469 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3470 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3471 @cindex library search path in linker script
3472 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3473 @cindex search path in linker script
3474 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3475 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3476 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3477 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3478 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3479 the command line option are searched first.
3480
3481 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3482 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3483 @cindex first input file
3484 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3485 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3486 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3487 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3488 first file.
3489 @end table
3490
3491 @ifclear SingleFormat
3492 @node Format Commands
3493 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3494 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3495
3496 @table @code
3497 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3498 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3499 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3500 @cindex output file format in linker script
3501 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3502 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3503 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3504 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3505 line option takes precedence.
3506
3507 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3508 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3509 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3510 desired endianness.
3511
3512 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3513 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3514 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3515 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3516
3517 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3518 command:
3519 @smallexample
3520 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3521 @end smallexample
3522 This says that the default format for the output file is
3523 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3524 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3525 format.
3526
3527 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3528 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3529 @cindex input file format in linker script
3530 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3531 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3532 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3533 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3534 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3535 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3536 @end table
3537 @end ifclear
3538
3539 @node REGION_ALIAS
3540 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3541 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3542 @cindex region alias
3543 @cindex region names
3544
3545 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3546 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3547
3548 @smallexample
3549 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3550 @end smallexample
3551
3552 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3553 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3554 to memory regions. An example follows.
3555
3556 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3557 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3558 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3559 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3560 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3561 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3562 sections:
3563
3564 @itemize @bullet
3565 @item
3566 @code{.text} program code;
3567 @item
3568 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3569 @item
3570 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3571 @item
3572 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3573 @end itemize
3574
3575 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3576 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3577 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3578 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3579 @code{C}:
3580 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3581 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3582 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3583 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3584 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3585 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3586 @end multitable
3587 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3588 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3589 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3590 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3591
3592 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3593 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3594 memory layout:
3595 @smallexample
3596 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3597
3598 SECTIONS
3599 @{
3600 .text :
3601 @{
3602 *(.text)
3603 @} > REGION_TEXT
3604 .rodata :
3605 @{
3606 *(.rodata)
3607 rodata_end = .;
3608 @} > REGION_RODATA
3609 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3610 @{
3611 data_start = .;
3612 *(.data)
3613 @} > REGION_DATA
3614 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3615 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3616 .bss :
3617 @{
3618 *(.bss)
3619 @} > REGION_BSS
3620 @}
3621 @end smallexample
3622
3623 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3624 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3625 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3626 @table @code
3627 @item A
3628 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3629 @smallexample
3630 MEMORY
3631 @{
3632 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3633 @}
3634
3635 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3636 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3637 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3638 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3639 @end smallexample
3640 @item B
3641 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3642 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3643 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3644 @smallexample
3645 MEMORY
3646 @{
3647 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3648 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3649 @}
3650
3651 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3652 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3653 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3654 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3655 @end smallexample
3656 @item C
3657 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3658 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3659 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3660 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3661 @smallexample
3662 MEMORY
3663 @{
3664 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3665 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3666 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3667 @}
3668
3669 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3670 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3671 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3672 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3673 @end smallexample
3674 @end table
3675
3676 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3677 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3678 necessary:
3679 @smallexample
3680 #include <string.h>
3681
3682 extern char data_start [];
3683 extern char data_size [];
3684 extern char data_load_start [];
3685
3686 void copy_data(void)
3687 @{
3688 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3689 @{
3690 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3691 @}
3692 @}
3693 @end smallexample
3694
3695 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3696 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3697 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3698
3699 @table @code
3700 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3701 @kindex ASSERT
3702 @cindex assertion in linker script
3703 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3704 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3705
3706 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3707 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3708 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3709 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3710 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3711
3712 @smallexample
3713 .stack :
3714 @{
3715 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3716 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3717 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3718 @}
3719 @end smallexample
3720
3721 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3722 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3723 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3724
3725 @smallexample
3726 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3727 .stack :
3728 @{
3729 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3730 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3731 @}
3732 @end smallexample
3733
3734 will work.
3735
3736 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3737 @kindex EXTERN
3738 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3739 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3740 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3741 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3742 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3743 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3744
3745 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3746 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3747 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3748 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3749 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3750 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3751
3752 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3753 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3754 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3755 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3756 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3757 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3758
3759 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3760 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3761 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3762 @cindex section groups
3763 @cindex COMDAT
3764 This command has the same effect as the
3765 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3766 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3767 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3768 specified (@samp{-r}).
3769
3770 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3771 @kindex INSERT
3772 @cindex insert user script into default script
3773 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3774 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3775 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3776 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3777 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3778 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3779 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3780 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3781 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3782 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3783 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3784 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3785 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3786
3787 @smallexample
3788 SECTIONS
3789 @{
3790 OVERLAY :
3791 @{
3792 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3793 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3794 @}
3795 @}
3796 INSERT AFTER .text;
3797 @end smallexample
3798
3799 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3800 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3801 @cindex cross references
3802 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3803 references among certain output sections.
3804
3805 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3806 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3807 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3808 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3809 a function defined in the other section.
3810
3811 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3812 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3813 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3814 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3815 names.
3816
3817 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3818 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3819 @cindex cross references
3820 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3821 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3822
3823 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3824 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3825 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3826 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3827 must never call back.
3828
3829 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3830 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3831 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3832 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3833 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3834 names, not input section names.
3835
3836 @ifclear SingleFormat
3837 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3838 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3839 @cindex machine architecture
3840 @cindex architecture
3841 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3842 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3843 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3844 the @samp{-f} option.
3845 @end ifclear
3846
3847 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3848 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3849 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3850 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3851 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3852 @xref{Expression Section}.
3853 @end table
3854
3855 @node Assignments
3856 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3857 @cindex assignment in scripts
3858 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3859 @cindex variables, defining
3860 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3861 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3862
3863 @menu
3864 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3865 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3866 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3867 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3868 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3869 @end menu
3870
3871 @node Simple Assignments
3872 @subsection Simple Assignments
3873
3874 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3875
3876 @table @code
3877 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3878 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3879 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3880 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3881 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3882 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3883 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3884 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3885 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3886 @end table
3887
3888 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3889 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3890 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3891
3892 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3893 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3894
3895 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3896
3897 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3898
3899 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3900 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3901 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3902
3903 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3904 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3905
3906 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3907 assignments may be used:
3908
3909 @smallexample
3910 floating_point = 0;
3911 SECTIONS
3912 @{
3913 .text :
3914 @{
3915 *(.text)
3916 _etext = .;
3917 @}
3918 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3919 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3920 @}
3921 @end smallexample
3922 @noindent
3923 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3924 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3925 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3926 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3927 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3928
3929 @node HIDDEN
3930 @subsection HIDDEN
3931 @cindex HIDDEN
3932 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3933 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3934
3935 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3936 @code{HIDDEN}:
3937
3938 @smallexample
3939 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3940 SECTIONS
3941 @{
3942 .text :
3943 @{
3944 *(.text)
3945 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3946 @}
3947 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3948 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3949 @}
3950 @end smallexample
3951 @noindent
3952 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3953
3954 @node PROVIDE
3955 @subsection PROVIDE
3956 @cindex PROVIDE
3957 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3958 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3959 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3960 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3961 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3962 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3963 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3964 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3965
3966 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3967 @smallexample
3968 SECTIONS
3969 @{
3970 .text :
3971 @{
3972 *(.text)
3973 _etext = .;
3974 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3975 @}
3976 @}
3977 @end smallexample
3978
3979 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3980 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3981 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3982 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3983 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3984 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3985
3986 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3987 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3988 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3989 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3990 hidden and won't be exported.
3991
3992 @node Source Code Reference
3993 @subsection Source Code Reference
3994
3995 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3996 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3997 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3998 symbol that does not have a value.
3999
4000 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4001 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4002 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4003 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4004 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4005 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4006 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4007 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4008
4009 @smallexample
4010 extern int foo;
4011 @end smallexample
4012
4013 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4014
4015 @smallexample
4016 _foo = 1000;
4017 @end smallexample
4018
4019 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4020 transformation has taken place.
4021
4022 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4023 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4024 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4025 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4026 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4027 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4028 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4029
4030 @smallexample
4031 int foo = 1000;
4032 @end smallexample
4033
4034 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4035 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4036 number 1000 is initially stored.
4037
4038 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4039 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4040 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4041 So:
4042
4043 @smallexample
4044 foo = 1;
4045 @end smallexample
4046
4047 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4048 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4049 address. Whereas:
4050
4051 @smallexample
4052 int * a = & foo;
4053 @end smallexample
4054
4055 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4056 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4057 the variable @samp{a}.
4058
4059 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4060 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4061 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4062
4063 @smallexample
4064 foo = 1000;
4065 @end smallexample
4066
4067 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4068 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4069 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4070 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4071 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4072
4073 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4074 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4075 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4076 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4077 linker script contains these declarations:
4078
4079 @smallexample
4080 @group
4081 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4082 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4083 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4084 @end group
4085 @end smallexample
4086
4087 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4088
4089 @smallexample
4090 @group
4091 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4092
4093 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4094 @end group
4095 @end smallexample
4096
4097 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4098 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4099 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4100
4101 @smallexample
4102 @group
4103 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4104
4105 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4106 @end group
4107 @end smallexample
4108
4109 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4110 operators.
4111
4112 @node SECTIONS
4113 @section SECTIONS Command
4114 @kindex SECTIONS
4115 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4116 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4117
4118 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4119 @smallexample
4120 SECTIONS
4121 @{
4122 @var{sections-command}
4123 @var{sections-command}
4124 @dots{}
4125 @}
4126 @end smallexample
4127
4128 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4129
4130 @itemize @bullet
4131 @item
4132 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4133 @item
4134 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4135 @item
4136 an output section description
4137 @item
4138 an overlay description
4139 @end itemize
4140
4141 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4142 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4143 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4144 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4145 the layout of the output file.
4146
4147 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4148 below.
4149
4150 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4151 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4152 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4153 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4154 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4155 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4156
4157 @menu
4158 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4159 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4160 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4161 * Input Section:: Input section description
4162 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4163 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4164 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4165 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4166 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4167 @end menu
4168
4169 @node Output Section Description
4170 @subsection Output Section Description
4171 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4172 @smallexample
4173 @group
4174 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4175 [AT(@var{lma})]
4176 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4177 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4178 [@var{constraint}]
4179 @{
4180 @var{output-section-command}
4181 @var{output-section-command}
4182 @dots{}
4183 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4184 @end group
4185 @end smallexample
4186
4187 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4188
4189 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4190 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4191 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4192 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4193 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4194
4195 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4196
4197 @itemize @bullet
4198 @item
4199 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4200 @item
4201 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4202 @item
4203 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4204 @item
4205 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4206 @end itemize
4207
4208 @node Output Section Name
4209 @subsection Output Section Name
4210 @cindex name, section
4211 @cindex section name
4212 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4213 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4214 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4215 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4216 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4217 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4218 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4219 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4220 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4221 commas must be quoted.
4222
4223 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4224 Discarding}.
4225
4226 @node Output Section Address
4227 @subsection Output Section Address
4228 @cindex address, section
4229 @cindex section address
4230 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4231 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4232 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4233
4234 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4235 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4236 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4237 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4238 contained within the output section.
4239
4240 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4241
4242 @itemize @bullet
4243 @item
4244 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4245 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4246 in that region.
4247
4248 @item
4249 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4250 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4251 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4252 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4253
4254 @item
4255 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4256 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4257 counter.
4258 @end itemize
4259
4260 @noindent
4261 For example:
4262
4263 @smallexample
4264 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4265 @end smallexample
4266
4267 @noindent
4268 and
4269
4270 @smallexample
4271 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4272 @end smallexample
4273
4274 @noindent
4275 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4276 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4277 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4278 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4279 input sections.
4280
4281 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4282 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4283 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4284 do something like this:
4285 @smallexample
4286 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4287 @end smallexample
4288 @noindent
4289 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4290 aligned upward to the specified value.
4291
4292 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4293 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4294 sections are ignored).
4295
4296 @node Input Section
4297 @subsection Input Section Description
4298 @cindex input sections
4299 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4300 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4301
4302 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4303 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4304 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4305 map the input files into your memory layout.
4306
4307 @menu
4308 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4309 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4310 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4311 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4312 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4313 @end menu
4314
4315 @node Input Section Basics
4316 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4317 @cindex input section basics
4318 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4319 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4320
4321 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4322 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4323
4324 The most common input section description is to include all input
4325 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4326 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4327 @smallexample
4328 *(.text)
4329 @end smallexample
4330 @noindent
4331 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4332 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4333 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4334 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4335 example:
4336 @smallexample
4337 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4338 @end smallexample
4339 @noindent
4340 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4341 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4342 placed inside the section list, for example:
4343 @smallexample
4344 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4345 @end smallexample
4346 @noindent
4347 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4348 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4349 more than one section, as described below.
4350
4351 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4352 @smallexample
4353 *(.text .rdata)
4354 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4355 @end smallexample
4356 @noindent
4357 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4358 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4359 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4360 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4361 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4362 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4363
4364 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4365 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4366 immediately following section, for example:
4367 @smallexample
4368 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4369 @end smallexample
4370 @noindent
4371 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4372 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4373 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4374 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4375 could be modified to:
4376 @smallexample
4377 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4378 @end smallexample
4379 @noindent
4380 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4381 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4382 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4383 @smallexample
4384 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4385 @end smallexample
4386
4387 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4388 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4389 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4390 @smallexample
4391 data.o(.data)
4392 @end smallexample
4393
4394 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4395 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4396
4397 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4398
4399 @smallexample
4400 @group
4401 SECTIONS @{
4402 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4403 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4404 @}
4405 @end group
4406 @end smallexample
4407
4408 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4409 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4410 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4411 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4412 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4413
4414 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4415 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4416 with no whitespace around the colon.
4417
4418 @table @samp
4419 @item archive:file
4420 matches file within archive
4421 @item archive:
4422 matches the whole archive
4423 @item :file
4424 matches file but not one in an archive
4425 @end table
4426
4427 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4428 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4429 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4430 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4431 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4432 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4433 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4434 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4435 command.
4436
4437 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4438 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4439 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4440 @smallexample
4441 data.o
4442 @end smallexample
4443
4444 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4445 and does not contain any wild card
4446 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4447 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4448 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4449 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4450 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4451 the archive search path.
4452
4453 @node Input Section Wildcards
4454 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4455 @cindex input section wildcards
4456 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4457 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4458 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4459 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4460 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4461
4462 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4463 pattern for the file name.
4464
4465 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4466
4467 @table @samp
4468 @item *
4469 matches any number of characters
4470 @item ?
4471 matches any single character
4472 @item [@var{chars}]
4473 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4474 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4475 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4476 @item \
4477 quotes the following character
4478 @end table
4479
4480 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4481 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4482 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4483 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4484 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4485 a @samp{/} character.
4486
4487 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4488 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4489 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4490
4491 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4492 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4493 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4494 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4495 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4496 @smallexample
4497 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4498 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4499 @end smallexample
4500
4501 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4502 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4503 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4504 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4505 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4506 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4507 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4508
4509 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4510 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4511 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4512 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4513 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4514 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4515
4516 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4517 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4518 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4519 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4520 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4521
4522 @cindex SORT
4523 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4524
4525 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4526 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4527
4528 @enumerate
4529 @item
4530 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4531 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4532 sections have the same name.
4533 @item
4534 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4535 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4536 sections have the same alignment.
4537 @item
4538 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4539 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4540 @item
4541 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4542 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4543 @item
4544 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4545 @end enumerate
4546
4547 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4548 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4549 takes precedence over the command line option.
4550
4551 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4552 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4553 treated as nested sorting command.
4554
4555 @enumerate
4556 @item
4557 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4558 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4559 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4560 @item
4561 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4562 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4563 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4564 @end enumerate
4565
4566 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4567 command line option will be ignored.
4568
4569 @cindex SORT_NONE
4570 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4571 section sorting option.
4572
4573 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4574 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4575 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4576
4577 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4578 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4579 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4580 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4581 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4582 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4583 @smallexample
4584 @group
4585 SECTIONS @{
4586 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4587 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4588 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4589 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4590 @}
4591 @end group
4592 @end smallexample
4593
4594 @node Input Section Common
4595 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4596 @cindex common symbol placement
4597 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4598 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4599 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4600 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4601 named @samp{COMMON}.
4602
4603 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4604 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4605 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4606 input files are placed in another section.
4607
4608 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4609 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4610 @smallexample
4611 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4612 @end smallexample
4613
4614 @cindex scommon section
4615 @cindex small common symbols
4616 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4617 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4618 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4619 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4620 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4621 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4622 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4623 locations.
4624
4625 @cindex [COMMON]
4626 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4627 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4628 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4629
4630 @node Input Section Keep
4631 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4632 @cindex KEEP
4633 @cindex garbage collection
4634 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4635 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4636 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4637 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4638 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4639
4640 @node Input Section Example
4641 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4642 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4643 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4644 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4645 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4646 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4647 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4648 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4649 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4650 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4651
4652 @smallexample
4653 @group
4654 SECTIONS @{
4655 outputa 0x10000 :
4656 @{
4657 all.o
4658 foo.o (.input1)
4659 @}
4660 @end group
4661 @group
4662 outputb :
4663 @{
4664 foo.o (.input2)
4665 foo1.o (.input1)
4666 @}
4667 @end group
4668 @group
4669 outputc :
4670 @{
4671 *(.input1)
4672 *(.input2)
4673 @}
4674 @}
4675 @end group
4676 @end smallexample
4677
4678 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4679 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4680 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4681 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4682 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4683 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4684 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4685
4686 @node Output Section Data
4687 @subsection Output Section Data
4688 @cindex data
4689 @cindex section data
4690 @cindex output section data
4691 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4692 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4693 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4694 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4695 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4696 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4697 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4698 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4699 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4700 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4701 counter.
4702
4703 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4704 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4705 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4706 stored.
4707
4708 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4709 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4710 @smallexample
4711 BYTE(1)
4712 LONG(addr)
4713 @end smallexample
4714
4715 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4716 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4717 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4718 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4719 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4720
4721 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4722 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4723 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4724 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4725 endianness of the first input object file.
4726
4727 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4728 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4729 @smallexample
4730 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4731 @end smallexample
4732 whereas this will work:
4733 @smallexample
4734 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4735 @end smallexample
4736
4737 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4738 @cindex holes, filling
4739 @cindex unspecified memory
4740 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4741 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4742 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4743 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4744 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4745 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4746 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4747 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4748 different parts of an output section.
4749
4750 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4751 value @samp{0x90}:
4752 @smallexample
4753 FILL(0x90909090)
4754 @end smallexample
4755
4756 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4757 section attribute, but it only affects the
4758 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4759 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4760 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4761 expression.
4762
4763 @node Output Section Keywords
4764 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4765 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4766 commands.
4767
4768 @table @code
4769 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4770 @cindex input filename symbols
4771 @cindex filename symbols
4772 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4773 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4774 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4775 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4776 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4777
4778 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4779 normally used for any other object file format.
4780
4781 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4782 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4783 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4784 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4785 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4786 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4787 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4788 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4789 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4790 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4791 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4792 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4793 ignored for other object file formats.
4794
4795 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4796 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4797 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4798 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4799 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4800 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4801 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4802 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4803 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4804 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4805 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4806 @code{exit}.
4807
4808 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4809 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4810 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4811 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4812 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4813 runtime code expects to see.
4814
4815 @smallexample
4816 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4817 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4818 *(.ctors)
4819 LONG(0)
4820 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4821 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4822 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4823 *(.dtors)
4824 LONG(0)
4825 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4826 @end smallexample
4827
4828 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4829 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4830 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4831 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4832 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4833 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4834 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4835 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4836
4837 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4838 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4839 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4840 scripts.
4841
4842 @end table
4843
4844 @node Output Section Discarding
4845 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4846 @cindex discarding sections
4847 @cindex sections, discarding
4848 @cindex removing sections
4849 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4850 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4851 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4852 @smallexample
4853 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4854 @end smallexample
4855 @noindent
4856 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4857 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4858 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4859 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4860 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4861 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4862 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4863 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4864 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4865
4866 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4867 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4868 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4869 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4870 section is discarded.
4871
4872 @cindex /DISCARD/
4873 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4874 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4875 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4876
4877 @node Output Section Attributes
4878 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4879 @cindex output section attributes
4880 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4881 like this:
4882
4883 @smallexample
4884 @group
4885 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4886 [AT(@var{lma})]
4887 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4888 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4889 [@var{constraint}]
4890 @{
4891 @var{output-section-command}
4892 @var{output-section-command}
4893 @dots{}
4894 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4895 @end group
4896 @end smallexample
4897
4898 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4899 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4900 remaining section attributes.
4901
4902 @menu
4903 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4904 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4905 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4906 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4907 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4908 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4909 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4910 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4911 @end menu
4912
4913 @node Output Section Type
4914 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4915 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4916 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4917
4918 @table @code
4919 @item NOLOAD
4920 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4921 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4922 @item DSECT
4923 @itemx COPY
4924 @itemx INFO
4925 @itemx OVERLAY
4926 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4927 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4928 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4929 section when the program is run.
4930 @end table
4931
4932 @kindex NOLOAD
4933 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4934 @cindex loading, preventing
4935 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4936 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4937 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4938 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4939 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4940 @smallexample
4941 @group
4942 SECTIONS @{
4943 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4944 @dots{}
4945 @}
4946 @end group
4947 @end smallexample
4948
4949 @node Output Section LMA
4950 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4951 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4952 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4953 @cindex load address
4954 @cindex section load address
4955 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4956 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4957 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4958 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4959 address is optional.
4960
4961 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4962 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4963 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4964 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4965 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4966
4967 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4968 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4969 load address:
4970
4971 @itemize @bullet
4972 @item
4973 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4974 the LMA address as well.
4975
4976 @item
4977 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4978
4979 @item
4980 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4981 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4982 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4983 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4984 the last section in the located region.
4985
4986 @item
4987 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4988 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4989
4990 @item
4991 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4992 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4993 @end itemize
4994
4995 @cindex ROM initialized data
4996 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4997 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4998 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4999 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5000 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5001 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5002 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5003 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5004 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5005
5006 @smallexample
5007 @group
5008 SECTIONS
5009 @{
5010 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5011 .mdata 0x2000 :
5012 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5013 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5014 .bss 0x3000 :
5015 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5016 @}
5017 @end group
5018 @end smallexample
5019
5020 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5021 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5022 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5023 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5024 script.
5025
5026 @smallexample
5027 @group
5028 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5029 char *src = &_etext;
5030 char *dst = &_data;
5031
5032 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5033 while (dst < &_edata)
5034 *dst++ = *src++;
5035
5036 /* Zero bss. */
5037 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5038 *dst = 0;
5039 @end group
5040 @end smallexample
5041
5042 @node Forced Output Alignment
5043 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5044 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5045 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5046 @cindex output section alignment
5047 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5048 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5049 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5050
5051 @node Forced Input Alignment
5052 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5053 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5054 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5055 @cindex input section alignment
5056 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5057 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5058 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5059
5060 @node Output Section Constraint
5061 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5062 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5063 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5064 @cindex constraints on output sections
5065 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5066 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5067 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5068 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5069
5070 @node Output Section Region
5071 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5072 @kindex >@var{region}
5073 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5074 @cindex memory regions and sections
5075 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5076 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5077
5078 Here is a simple example:
5079 @smallexample
5080 @group
5081 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5082 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5083 @end group
5084 @end smallexample
5085
5086 @node Output Section Phdr
5087 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5088 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5089 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5090 @cindex program headers and sections
5091 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5092 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5093 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5094 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5095 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5096 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5097
5098 Here is a simple example:
5099 @smallexample
5100 @group
5101 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5102 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5103 @end group
5104 @end smallexample
5105
5106 @node Output Section Fill
5107 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5108 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5109 @cindex section fill pattern
5110 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5111 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5112 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5113 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5114 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5115 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5116 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5117 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5118 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5119 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5120 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5121 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5122 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5123
5124 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5125 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5126
5127 Here is a simple example:
5128 @smallexample
5129 @group
5130 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5131 @end group
5132 @end smallexample
5133
5134 @node Overlay Description
5135 @subsection Overlay Description
5136 @kindex OVERLAY
5137 @cindex overlays
5138 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5139 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5140 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5141 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5142 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5143 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5144 than another.
5145
5146 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5147 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5148 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5149 command is as follows:
5150 @smallexample
5151 @group
5152 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5153 @{
5154 @var{secname1}
5155 @{
5156 @var{output-section-command}
5157 @var{output-section-command}
5158 @dots{}
5159 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5160 @var{secname2}
5161 @{
5162 @var{output-section-command}
5163 @var{output-section-command}
5164 @dots{}
5165 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5166 @dots{}
5167 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5168 @end group
5169 @end smallexample
5170
5171 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5172 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5173 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5174 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5175 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5176 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5177
5178 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5179 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5180
5181 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5182 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5183 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5184 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5185 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5186 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5187
5188 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5189 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5190 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5191 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5192 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5193
5194 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5195 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5196 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5197 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5198 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5199 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5200 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5201
5202 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5203 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5204
5205 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5206 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5207 @smallexample
5208 @group
5209 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5210 @{
5211 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5212 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5213 @}
5214 @end group
5215 @end smallexample
5216 @noindent
5217 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5218 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5219 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5220 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5221 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5222 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5223
5224 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5225 like the following.
5226
5227 @smallexample
5228 @group
5229 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5230 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5231 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5232 @end group
5233 @end smallexample
5234
5235 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5236 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5237 example could have been written identically as follows.
5238
5239 @smallexample
5240 @group
5241 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5242 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5243 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5244 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5245 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5246 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5247 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5248 @end group
5249 @end smallexample
5250
5251 @node MEMORY
5252 @section MEMORY Command
5253 @kindex MEMORY
5254 @cindex memory regions
5255 @cindex regions of memory
5256 @cindex allocating memory
5257 @cindex discontinuous memory
5258 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5259 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5260
5261 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5262 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5263 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5264 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5265 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5266 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5267 around to fit into the available regions.
5268
5269 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5270 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5271 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5272 @code{MEMORY} is:
5273 @smallexample
5274 @group
5275 MEMORY
5276 @{
5277 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5278 @dots{}
5279 @}
5280 @end group
5281 @end smallexample
5282
5283 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5284 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5285 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5286 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5287 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5288 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5289 command.
5290
5291 @cindex memory region attributes
5292 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5293 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5294 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5295 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5296 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5297 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5298 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5299
5300 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5301 @table @samp
5302 @item R
5303 Read-only section
5304 @item W
5305 Read/write section
5306 @item X
5307 Executable section
5308 @item A
5309 Allocatable section
5310 @item I
5311 Initialized section
5312 @item L
5313 Same as @samp{I}
5314 @item !
5315 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5316 @end table
5317
5318 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5319 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5320 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5321 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5322 attributes.
5323
5324 @kindex ORIGIN =
5325 @kindex o =
5326 @kindex org =
5327 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5328 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5329 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5330 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5331 @code{ORG}).
5332
5333 @kindex LENGTH =
5334 @kindex len =
5335 @kindex l =
5336 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5337 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5338 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5339 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5340
5341 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5342 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5343 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5344 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5345 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5346 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5347 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5348 region.
5349
5350 @smallexample
5351 @group
5352 MEMORY
5353 @{
5354 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5355 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5356 @}
5357 @end group
5358 @end smallexample
5359
5360 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5361 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5362 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5363 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5364 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5365 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5366 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5367 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5368 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5369
5370 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5371 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5372 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5373
5374 @smallexample
5375 @group
5376 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5377 @end group
5378 @end smallexample
5379
5380 @node PHDRS
5381 @section PHDRS Command
5382 @kindex PHDRS
5383 @cindex program headers
5384 @cindex ELF program headers
5385 @cindex program segments
5386 @cindex segments, ELF
5387 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5388 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5389 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5390 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5391
5392 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5393 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5394 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5395 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5396 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5397
5398 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5399 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5400 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5401 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5402 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5403
5404 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5405 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5406 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5407
5408 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5409 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5410
5411 @smallexample
5412 @group
5413 PHDRS
5414 @{
5415 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5416 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5417 @}
5418 @end group
5419 @end smallexample
5420
5421 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5422 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5423 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5424 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5425 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5426 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5427
5428 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5429 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5430 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5431 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5432 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5433 Section Phdr}.
5434
5435 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5436 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5437 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5438 contain the section.
5439
5440 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5441 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5442 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5443 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5444 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5445 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5446 segment at all.
5447
5448 @kindex FILEHDR
5449 @kindex PHDRS
5450 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5451 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5452 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5453 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5454 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5455 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5456 these keywords.
5457
5458 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5459 value of the keyword.
5460
5461 @table @asis
5462 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5463 Indicates an unused program header.
5464
5465 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5466 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5467 the file.
5468
5469 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5470 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5471
5472 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5473 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5474 found.
5475
5476 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5477 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5478
5479 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5480 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5481 ABI.
5482
5483 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5484 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5485
5486 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5487 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5488
5489 @item @var{expression}
5490 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5491 be used for types not defined above.
5492 @end table
5493
5494 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5495 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5496 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5497 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5498 output section attribute.
5499
5500 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5501 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5502 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5503 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5504 header.
5505
5506 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5507 headers used on a native ELF system.
5508
5509 @example
5510 @group
5511 PHDRS
5512 @{
5513 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5514 interp PT_INTERP ;
5515 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5516 data PT_LOAD ;
5517 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5518 @}
5519
5520 SECTIONS
5521 @{
5522 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5523 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5524 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5525 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5526 @dots{}
5527 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5528 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5529 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5530 @dots{}
5531 @}
5532 @end group
5533 @end example
5534
5535 @node VERSION
5536 @section VERSION Command
5537 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5538 @cindex symbol versions
5539 @cindex version script
5540 @cindex versions of symbols
5541 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5542 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5543 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5544 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5545 shared library.
5546
5547 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5548 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5549 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5550
5551 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5552 @smallexample
5553 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5554 @end smallexample
5555
5556 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5557 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5558 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5559 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5560 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5561 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5562 library.
5563
5564 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5565 examples.
5566
5567 @smallexample
5568 VERS_1.1 @{
5569 global:
5570 foo1;
5571 local:
5572 old*;
5573 original*;
5574 new*;
5575 @};
5576
5577 VERS_1.2 @{
5578 foo2;
5579 @} VERS_1.1;
5580
5581 VERS_2.0 @{
5582 bar1; bar2;
5583 extern "C++" @{
5584 ns::*;
5585 "f(int, double)";
5586 @};
5587 @} VERS_1.2;
5588 @end smallexample
5589
5590 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5591 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5592 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5593 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5594 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5595 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5596 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5597 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5598 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5599 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5600
5601 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5602 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5603 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5604
5605 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5606 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5607 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5608
5609 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5610 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5611 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5612 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5613 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5614 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5615 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5616 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5617 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5618
5619 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5620 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5621 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5622 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5623
5624 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5625 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5626 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5627 won't.
5628
5629 @smallexample
5630 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5631 @end smallexample
5632
5633 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5634 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5635 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5636 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5637 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5638 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5639 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5640 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5641 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5642 search for each symbol reference.
5643
5644 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5645 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5646 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5647 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5648 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5649 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5650 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5651 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5652 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5653
5654 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5655 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5656 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5657 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5658 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5659 @smallexample
5660 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5661 @end smallexample
5662 @noindent
5663 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5664 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5665 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5666 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5667 takes precedence over a version script.
5668
5669 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5670 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5671 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5672 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5673 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5674
5675 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5676 source file. Here is an example:
5677
5678 @smallexample
5679 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5680 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5681 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5682 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5683 @end smallexample
5684
5685 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5686 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5687 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5688 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5689
5690 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5691 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5692 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5693 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5694 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5695 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5696
5697 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5698 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5699 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5700 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5701
5702 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5703
5704 @smallexample
5705 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5706 @end smallexample
5707
5708 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5709 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5710 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5711 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5712 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5713
5714 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5715 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5716 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5717 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5718 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5719 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5720 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5721 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5722 expect when you upgrade.
5723
5724 @node Expressions
5725 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5726 @cindex expressions
5727 @cindex arithmetic
5728 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5729 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5730 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5731 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5732
5733 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5734
5735 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5736 expressions.
5737
5738 @menu
5739 * Constants:: Constants
5740 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5741 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5742 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5743 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5744 * Operators:: Operators
5745 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5746 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5747 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5748 @end menu
5749
5750 @node Constants
5751 @subsection Constants
5752 @cindex integer notation
5753 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5754 All constants are integers.
5755
5756 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5757 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5758 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5759 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5760 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5761 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5762
5763 @cindex scaled integers
5764 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5765 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5766 @cindex suffixes for integers
5767 @cindex integer suffixes
5768 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5769 constant by
5770 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5771 @ifnottex
5772 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5773 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5774 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5775 @end ifnottex
5776 @tex
5777 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5778 @end tex
5779 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5780 respectively. For example, the following
5781 all refer to the same quantity:
5782
5783 @smallexample
5784 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5785 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5786 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5787 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5788 @end smallexample
5789
5790 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5791 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5792
5793 @node Symbolic Constants
5794 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5795 @cindex symbolic constants
5796 @kindex CONSTANT
5797 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5798 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5799
5800 @table @code
5801 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5802 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5803 The target's maximum page size.
5804
5805 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5806 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5807 The target's default page size.
5808 @end table
5809
5810 So for example:
5811
5812 @smallexample
5813 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5814 @end smallexample
5815
5816 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5817 supported by the target.
5818
5819 @node Symbols
5820 @subsection Symbol Names
5821 @cindex symbol names
5822 @cindex names
5823 @cindex quoted symbol names
5824 @kindex "
5825 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5826 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5827 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5828 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5829 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5830 @smallexample
5831 "SECTION" = 9;
5832 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5833 @end smallexample
5834
5835 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5836 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5837 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5838
5839 @node Orphan Sections
5840 @subsection Orphan Sections
5841 @cindex orphan
5842 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5843 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5844 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5845 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5846 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5847
5848 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5849 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5850 placed at the end of that output section.
5851
5852 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5853 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5854 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5855 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5856 one new output section.
5857
5858 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5859 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5860 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5861 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5862 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5863 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5864 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5865
5866 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5867 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5868 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5869
5870 @node Location Counter
5871 @subsection The Location Counter
5872 @kindex .
5873 @cindex dot
5874 @cindex location counter
5875 @cindex current output location
5876 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5877 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5878 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5879 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5880 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5881
5882 @cindex holes
5883 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5884 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5885 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5886 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5887 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5888
5889 @smallexample
5890 SECTIONS
5891 @{
5892 output :
5893 @{
5894 file1(.text)
5895 . = . + 1000;
5896 file2(.text)
5897 . += 1000;
5898 file3(.text)
5899 @} = 0x12345678;
5900 @}
5901 @end smallexample
5902 @noindent
5903 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5904 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5905 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5906 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5907 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5908 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5909
5910 @cindex dot inside sections
5911 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5912 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5913 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5914 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5915 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5916 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5917
5918 @smallexample
5919 SECTIONS
5920 @{
5921 . = 0x100
5922 .text: @{
5923 *(.text)
5924 . = 0x200
5925 @}
5926 . = 0x500
5927 .data: @{
5928 *(.data)
5929 . += 0x600
5930 @}
5931 @}
5932 @end smallexample
5933
5934 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5935 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5936 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5937 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5938 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5939 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5940 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5941 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5942
5943 @cindex dot outside sections
5944 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5945 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5946 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5947
5948 @smallexample
5949 SECTIONS
5950 @{
5951 start_of_text = . ;
5952 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5953 end_of_text = . ;
5954
5955 start_of_data = . ;
5956 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5957 end_of_data = . ;
5958 @}
5959 @end smallexample
5960
5961 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5962 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5963 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5964 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5965 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5966 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5967 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5968 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5969 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5970 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5971 as follows:
5972
5973 @smallexample
5974 SECTIONS
5975 @{
5976 start_of_text = . ;
5977 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5978 end_of_text = . ;
5979
5980 start_of_data = . ;
5981 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5982 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5983 end_of_data = . ;
5984 @}
5985 @end smallexample
5986
5987 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5988 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5989 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5990 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5991 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5992 section. So you could write:
5993
5994 @smallexample
5995 SECTIONS
5996 @{
5997 start_of_text = . ;
5998 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5999 end_of_text = . ;
6000
6001 . = . ;
6002 start_of_data = . ;
6003 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6004 end_of_data = . ;
6005 @}
6006 @end smallexample
6007
6008 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6009 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6010
6011 @need 2000
6012 @node Operators
6013 @subsection Operators
6014 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6015 @cindex arithmetic operators
6016 @cindex precedence in expressions
6017 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6018 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6019 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6020 @ifnottex
6021 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6022 @smallexample
6023 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6024 (highest)
6025 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6026 2 left * / %
6027 3 left + -
6028 4 left >> <<
6029 5 left == != > < <= >=
6030 6 left &
6031 7 left |
6032 8 left &&
6033 9 left ||
6034 10 right ? :
6035 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6036 (lowest)
6037 @end smallexample
6038 Notes:
6039 (1) Prefix operators
6040 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6041 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6042 @end ifnottex
6043 @tex
6044 \vskip \baselineskip
6045 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6046 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6047 \hrule
6048 \halign
6049 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6050 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6051 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6052 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6053 \noalign{\hrule}
6054 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6055 &highest&&&&&\cr
6056 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6057 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6058 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6059 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6060 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6061 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6062 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6063 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6064 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6065 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6066 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6067 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6068 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6069 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6070 \hrule}
6071 @end tex
6072 @iftex
6073 {
6074 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6075 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6076 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6077 }
6078 @end iftex
6079 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6080
6081 @node Evaluation
6082 @subsection Evaluation
6083 @cindex lazy evaluation
6084 @cindex expression evaluation order
6085 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6086 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6087
6088 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6089 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6090 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6091 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6092
6093 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6094 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6095 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6096 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6097
6098 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6099 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6100 allocation.
6101
6102 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6103 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6104
6105 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6106 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6107 following
6108 @smallexample
6109 @group
6110 SECTIONS
6111 @{
6112 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6113 @{ *(.text) @}
6114 @}
6115 @end group
6116 @end smallexample
6117 @noindent
6118 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6119 address}.
6120
6121 @node Expression Section
6122 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6123 @cindex expression sections
6124 @cindex absolute expressions
6125 @cindex relative expressions
6126 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6127 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6128 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6129 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6130 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6131 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6132 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6133 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6134 operations.
6135
6136 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6137 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6138 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6139 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6140 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6141 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6142 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6143 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6144 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6145 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6146 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6147 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6148 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6149 everywhere.
6150
6151 In the following simple example,
6152
6153 @smallexample
6154 @group
6155 SECTIONS
6156 @{
6157 . = 0x100;
6158 __executable_start = 0x100;
6159 .data :
6160 @{
6161 . = 0x10;
6162 __data_start = 0x10;
6163 *(.data)
6164 @}
6165 @dots{}
6166 @}
6167 @end group
6168 @end smallexample
6169
6170 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6171 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6172 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6173 section in the second two assignments.
6174
6175 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6176 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6177
6178 @itemize @bullet
6179 @item
6180 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6181 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6182 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6183 @item
6184 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6185 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6186 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6187 @item
6188 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6189 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6190 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6191 before applying the operator.
6192 @end itemize
6193
6194 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6195
6196 @itemize @bullet
6197 @item
6198 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6199 @item
6200 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6201 @item
6202 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6203 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6204 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6205 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6206 but an absolute address otherwise.
6207 @item
6208 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6209 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6210 section as the relative operand(s).
6211 @item
6212 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6213 conversions) is an absolute address.
6214 @end itemize
6215
6216 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6217 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6218 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6219 section @samp{.data}:
6220 @smallexample
6221 SECTIONS
6222 @{
6223 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6224 @}
6225 @end smallexample
6226 @noindent
6227 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6228 @samp{.data} section.
6229
6230 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6231 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6232
6233 @node Builtin Functions
6234 @subsection Builtin Functions
6235 @cindex functions in expressions
6236 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6237 use in linker script expressions.
6238
6239 @table @code
6240 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6241 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6242 @cindex expression, absolute
6243 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6244 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6245 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6246 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6247
6248 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6249 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6250 @cindex section address in expression
6251 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6252 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6253 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6254 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6255 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6256 the other two will be absolute:
6257 @smallexample
6258 @group
6259 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6260 .output1 :
6261 @{
6262 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6263 @dots{}
6264 @}
6265 .output :
6266 @{
6267 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6268 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6269 @}
6270 @dots{} @}
6271 @end group
6272 @end smallexample
6273
6274 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6275 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6276 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6277 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6278 @cindex round up location counter
6279 @cindex align location counter
6280 @cindex round up expression
6281 @cindex align expression
6282 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6283 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6284 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6285 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6286 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6287 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6288
6289 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6290 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6291 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6292 input sections:
6293 @smallexample
6294 @group
6295 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6296 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6297 *(.data)
6298 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6299 @}
6300 @dots{} @}
6301 @end group
6302 @end smallexample
6303 @noindent
6304 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6305 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6306 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6307 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6308
6309 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6310
6311 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6312 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6313 @cindex section alignment
6314 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6315 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6316 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6317 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6318 value in that section.
6319 @smallexample
6320 @group
6321 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6322 .output @{
6323 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6324 @dots{}
6325 @}
6326 @dots{} @}
6327 @end group
6328 @end smallexample
6329
6330 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6331 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6332 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6333 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6334 section.
6335
6336 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6337 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6338 This is equivalent to either
6339 @smallexample
6340 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6341 @end smallexample
6342 or
6343 @smallexample
6344 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6345 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6346 @end smallexample
6347 @noindent
6348 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6349 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6350 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6351 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6352 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6353 bytes in the on-disk file.
6354
6355 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6356 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6357 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6358 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6359 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6360
6361 @noindent
6362 Example:
6363 @smallexample
6364 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6365 @end smallexample
6366
6367 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6368 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6369 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6370 evaluation purposes.
6371
6372 @smallexample
6373 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6374 @end smallexample
6375
6376 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6377 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6378 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6379 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6380 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6381 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6382 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6383 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6384 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6385 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6386 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6387 section alignment.
6388
6389 @smallexample
6390 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6391 @end smallexample
6392
6393 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6394 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6395 @cindex symbol defaults
6396 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6397 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6398 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6399 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6400 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6401 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6402 existed, its value is preserved:
6403
6404 @smallexample
6405 @group
6406 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6407 .text : @{
6408 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6409 @dots{}
6410 @}
6411 @dots{}
6412 @}
6413 @end group
6414 @end smallexample
6415
6416 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6417 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6418 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6419
6420 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6421 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6422 @cindex section load address in expression
6423 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6424 Section LMA}).
6425
6426 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6427 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6428 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6429 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6430
6431 @kindex MAX
6432 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6433 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6434
6435 @kindex MIN
6436 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6437 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6438
6439 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6440 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6441 @cindex unallocated address, next
6442 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6443 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6444 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6445 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6446
6447 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6448 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6449 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6450
6451 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6452 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6453 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6454 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6455 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6456 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6457 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6458 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6459 name.
6460
6461 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6462 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6463 @cindex section size
6464 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6465 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6466 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6467 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6468 @smallexample
6469 @group
6470 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6471 .output @{
6472 .start = . ;
6473 @dots{}
6474 .end = . ;
6475 @}
6476 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6477 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6478 @dots{} @}
6479 @end group
6480 @end smallexample
6481
6482 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6483 @itemx sizeof_headers
6484 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6485 @cindex header size
6486 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6487 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6488 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6489 choose, to facilitate paging.
6490
6491 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6492 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6493 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6494 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6495 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6496 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6497 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6498 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6499 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6500 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6501 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6502 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6503 @end table
6504
6505 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6506 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6507 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6508 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6509 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6510 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6511 linker will report an error.
6512
6513 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6514
6515 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6516 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6517 commands.
6518
6519 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6520 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6521 read. This can affect archive searching.
6522
6523 @ifset GENERIC
6524 @node Machine Dependent
6525 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6526
6527 @cindex machine dependencies
6528 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6529 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6530 functionality are not listed.
6531
6532 @menu
6533 @ifset H8300
6534 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6535 @end ifset
6536 @ifset I960
6537 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6538 @end ifset
6539 @ifset M68HC11
6540 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6541 @end ifset
6542 @ifset ARM
6543 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6544 @end ifset
6545 @ifset HPPA
6546 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6547 @end ifset
6548 @ifset M68K
6549 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6550 @end ifset
6551 @ifset MIPS
6552 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6553 @end ifset
6554 @ifset MMIX
6555 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6556 @end ifset
6557 @ifset MSP430
6558 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6559 @end ifset
6560 @ifset NDS32
6561 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6562 @end ifset
6563 @ifset NIOSII
6564 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6565 @end ifset
6566 @ifset POWERPC
6567 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6568 @end ifset
6569 @ifset POWERPC64
6570 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6571 @end ifset
6572 @ifset S/390
6573 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6574 @end ifset
6575 @ifset SPU
6576 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6577 @end ifset
6578 @ifset TICOFF
6579 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6580 @end ifset
6581 @ifset WIN32
6582 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6583 @end ifset
6584 @ifset XTENSA
6585 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6586 @end ifset
6587 @end menu
6588 @end ifset
6589
6590 @ifset H8300
6591 @ifclear GENERIC
6592 @raisesections
6593 @end ifclear
6594
6595 @node H8/300
6596 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6597
6598 @cindex H8/300 support
6599 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6600 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6601
6602 @table @emph
6603 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6604 @item relaxing address modes
6605 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6606 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6607 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6608 respectively.
6609
6610 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6611 @item synthesizing instructions
6612 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6613 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6614 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6615 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6616 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6617 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6618 top page of memory).
6619
6620 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6621 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6622 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6623 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6624 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6625 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6626 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6627
6628 @item bit manipulation instructions
6629 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6630 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6631 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6632 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6633 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6634 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6635 the top page of memory).
6636
6637 @item system control instructions
6638 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6639 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6640 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6641 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6642 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6643 the top page of memory).
6644 @end table
6645
6646 @ifclear GENERIC
6647 @lowersections
6648 @end ifclear
6649 @end ifset
6650
6651 @ifclear GENERIC
6652 @ifset Renesas
6653 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6654 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6655 @node Renesas
6656 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6657
6658 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6659 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6660 options are required for these chips.
6661 @end ifset
6662 @end ifclear
6663
6664 @ifset I960
6665 @ifclear GENERIC
6666 @raisesections
6667 @end ifclear
6668
6669 @node i960
6670 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6671
6672 @cindex i960 support
6673
6674 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6675 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6676 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6677 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6678 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6679 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6680 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6681
6682 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6683 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6684 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6685 the names
6686
6687 @smallexample
6688 @group
6689 try
6690 libtry.a
6691 tryca
6692 libtryca.a
6693 @end group
6694 @end smallexample
6695
6696 @noindent
6697 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6698 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6699
6700 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6701 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6702 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6703 specifies a library.
6704
6705 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6706 @cindex relaxing on i960
6707 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6708 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6709 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6710 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6711 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6712 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6713 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6714 not itself call any subroutines).
6715
6716 @ifclear GENERIC
6717 @lowersections
6718 @end ifclear
6719 @end ifset
6720
6721 @ifset ARM
6722 @ifclear GENERIC
6723 @raisesections
6724 @end ifclear
6725
6726 @ifset M68HC11
6727 @ifclear GENERIC
6728 @raisesections
6729 @end ifclear
6730
6731 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6732 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6733
6734 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6735
6736 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6737
6738 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6739 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6740
6741 @table @emph
6742 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6743 @item relaxing address modes
6744 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6745 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6746 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6747 respectively.
6748
6749 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6750 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6751 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6752
6753 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6754 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6755 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6756 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6757 @code{bset} instructions.
6758
6759 @end table
6760
6761 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6762
6763 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6764 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6765 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6766 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6767 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6768 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6769 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6770 point to the function trampoline.
6771
6772 @ifclear GENERIC
6773 @lowersections
6774 @end ifclear
6775 @end ifset
6776
6777 @node ARM
6778 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6779
6780 @cindex ARM interworking support
6781 @kindex --support-old-code
6782 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6783 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6784 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6785 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6786 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6787 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6788 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6789 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6790 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6791 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6792
6793 @cindex thumb entry point
6794 @cindex entry point, thumb
6795 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6796 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6797 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6798 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6799 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6800 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6801
6802 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6803 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6804 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6805 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6806 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6807 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6808
6809 @cindex BE8
6810 @kindex --be8
6811 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6812 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6813 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6814 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6815 little-endian code.
6816
6817 @cindex TARGET1
6818 @kindex --target1-rel
6819 @kindex --target1-abs
6820 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6821 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6822 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6823 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6824
6825 @cindex TARGET2
6826 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6827 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6828 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6829 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6830 @table @samp
6831 @item rel
6832 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6833 @item abs
6834 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6835 @item got-rel
6836 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6837 @end table
6838
6839 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6840 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6841 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6842 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6843 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6844 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6845
6846 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6847 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6848 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6849
6850 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6851 relocations are ignored.
6852
6853 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6854 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6855 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6856 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6857
6858 @smallexample
6859 TST rM, #1
6860 MOVEQ PC, rM
6861 BX Rn
6862 @end smallexample
6863
6864 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6865 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6866 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6867
6868 @cindex USE_BLX
6869 @kindex --use-blx
6870 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6871 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6872 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6873 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6874 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6875
6876 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6877 specify it if you are using that target.
6878
6879 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6880 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6881 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6882 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6883 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6884 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6885 the support code can read the intended values.
6886
6887 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6888 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6889 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6890 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6891 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6892 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6893
6894 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6895 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6896 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6897 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6898 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6899 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6900
6901 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6902 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6903 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6904 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6905 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6906 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6907 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6908
6909 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6910 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6911 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6912 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6913 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6914 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6915 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6916
6917 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6918 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6919 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6920
6921 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6922 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6923
6924 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6925 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6926 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6927 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6928 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6929 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6930 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6931 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6932
6933 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6934 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6935
6936 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6937 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6938 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6939 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6940 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6941
6942 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6943 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6944 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6945 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6946 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6947 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6948
6949 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6950 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6951
6952 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6953 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6954 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6955 occurs.
6956
6957 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6958 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6959 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6960 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6961 occurs.
6962
6963 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6964 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6965 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6966 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6967 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6968 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6969 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6970 not be diagnosed.
6971
6972 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6973 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6974 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6975 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6976 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6977 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6978 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6979
6980 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6981 @kindex --pic-veneer
6982 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6983 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6984 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6985 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6986
6987 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6988 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6989 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6990 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6991 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6992 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6993 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6994 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6995 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6996 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6997 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6998 where they should be placed.
6999
7000 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7001 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7002 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7003 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7004 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7005 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7006 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7007 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7008 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7009 from the input sections.
7010
7011 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7012 @samp{N = +1}.
7013
7014 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7015 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7016 otherwise.
7017
7018 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7019 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7020 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7021 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7022
7023 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7024
7025 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7026 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7027 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7028 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7029
7030 Please contact ARM for further details.
7031
7032 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7033 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7034 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7035 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7036
7037 @kindex --long-plt
7038 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7039 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7040 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7041 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7042
7043 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7044 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7045 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7046 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7047
7048 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7049 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7050 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7051 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7052 veneers in memory.
7053
7054 @kindex --cmse-implib
7055 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7056 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7057 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7058 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7059 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7060
7061 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7062 @cindex Input import library
7063 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7064 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7065 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7066 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7067 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7068 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7069 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7070 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7071 specified.
7072
7073 @ifclear GENERIC
7074 @lowersections
7075 @end ifclear
7076 @end ifset
7077
7078 @ifset HPPA
7079 @ifclear GENERIC
7080 @raisesections
7081 @end ifclear
7082
7083 @node HPPA ELF32
7084 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7085 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7086 @kindex --multi-subspace
7087 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7088 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7089 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7090 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7091 multiple sub-spaces.
7092
7093 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7094 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7095 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7096 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7097 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7098 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7099 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7100 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7101 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7102 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7103 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7104 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7105 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7106 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7107 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7108 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7109
7110 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7111 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7112 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7113 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7114
7115 @ifclear GENERIC
7116 @lowersections
7117 @end ifclear
7118 @end ifset
7119
7120 @ifset M68K
7121 @ifclear GENERIC
7122 @raisesections
7123 @end ifclear
7124
7125 @node M68K
7126 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7127
7128 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7129 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7130 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7131 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7132 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7133 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7134 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7135 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7136 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7137 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7138 support such GOTs.
7139 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7140 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7141 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7142 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7143
7144 @ifclear GENERIC
7145 @lowersections
7146 @end ifclear
7147 @end ifset
7148
7149 @ifset MIPS
7150 @ifclear GENERIC
7151 @raisesections
7152 @end ifclear
7153
7154 @node MIPS
7155 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7156
7157 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7158 @kindex --insn32
7159 @kindex --no-insn32
7160 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7161 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7162 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7163 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7164 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7165 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7166
7167 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7168 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7169 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7170 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7171 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7172 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7173 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7174 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7175 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7176 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7177 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7178 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7179
7180 @ifclear GENERIC
7181 @lowersections
7182 @end ifclear
7183 @end ifset
7184
7185 @ifset MMIX
7186 @ifclear GENERIC
7187 @raisesections
7188 @end ifclear
7189
7190 @node MMIX
7191 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7192 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7193 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7194 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7195 can translate between the two formats.
7196
7197 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7198 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7199 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7200 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7201 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7202 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7203 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7204 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7205
7206 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7207 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7208 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7209 of a section.
7210
7211 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7212 are left out from an mmo file.
7213
7214 @ifclear GENERIC
7215 @lowersections
7216 @end ifclear
7217 @end ifset
7218
7219 @ifset MSP430
7220 @ifclear GENERIC
7221 @raisesections
7222 @end ifclear
7223
7224 @node MSP430
7225 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7226 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7227 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7228 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7229
7230 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7231 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7232
7233 @table @code
7234 @item @samp{.vectors}
7235 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7236
7237 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7238 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7239 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7240
7241 @item @samp{.infomem}
7242 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7243 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7244
7245 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7246 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7247 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7248
7249 @item @samp{.noinit}
7250 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7251
7252 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7253 @end table
7254
7255 @ifclear GENERIC
7256 @lowersections
7257 @end ifclear
7258 @end ifset
7259
7260 @ifset NDS32
7261 @ifclear GENERIC
7262 @raisesections
7263 @end ifclear
7264
7265 @node NDS32
7266 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7267 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7268 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7269 relaxes objects according to these options.
7270
7271 @table @code
7272 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7273 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7274
7275 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7276 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7277
7278 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7279 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7280
7281 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7282 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7283
7284 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7285 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7286
7287 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7288 Update the existing EX9 table.
7289
7290 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7291 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7292
7293 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7294 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7295
7296 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7297 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7298
7299 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7300 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7301 @end table
7302
7303 @ifclear GENERIC
7304 @lowersections
7305 @end ifclear
7306 @end ifset
7307
7308 @ifset NIOSII
7309 @ifclear GENERIC
7310 @raisesections
7311 @end ifclear
7312
7313 @node Nios II
7314 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7315 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7316 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7317
7318 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7319 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7320 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7321 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7322 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7323 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7324 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7325 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7326 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7327 larger than 256MB.
7328
7329 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7330 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7331 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7332 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7333 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7334 register as a temporary.
7335
7336 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7337 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7338 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7339
7340 @ifclear GENERIC
7341 @lowersections
7342 @end ifclear
7343 @end ifset
7344
7345 @ifset POWERPC
7346 @ifclear GENERIC
7347 @raisesections
7348 @end ifclear
7349
7350 @node PowerPC ELF32
7351 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7352 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7353 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7354 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7355 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7356 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7357 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7358 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7359 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7360 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7361 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7362 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7363 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7364
7365 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7366 @table @option
7367 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7368 @kindex --bss-plt
7369 @item --bss-plt
7370 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7371 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7372 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7373 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7374 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7375 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7376 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7377 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7378
7379 @kindex --secure-plt
7380 @item --secure-plt
7381 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7382 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7383 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7384 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7385 style BSS PLT.
7386
7387 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7388 @kindex --sdata-got
7389 @item --sdata-got
7390 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7391 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7392 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7393 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7394 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7395 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7396 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7397 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7398 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7399 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7400 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7401 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7402
7403 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7404 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7405 @item --emit-stub-syms
7406 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7407 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7408
7409 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7410 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7411 @item --no-tls-optimize
7412 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7413 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7414 disable the optimization.
7415 @end table
7416
7417 @ifclear GENERIC
7418 @lowersections
7419 @end ifclear
7420 @end ifset
7421
7422 @ifset POWERPC64
7423 @ifclear GENERIC
7424 @raisesections
7425 @end ifclear
7426
7427 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7428 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7429
7430 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7431 @table @option
7432 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7433 @kindex --stub-group-size
7434 @item --stub-group-size
7435 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7436 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7437 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7438 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7439 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7440 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7441 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7442 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7443 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7444 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7445 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7446 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7447 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7448 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7449
7450 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7451 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7452 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7453 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7454
7455 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7456 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7457 @item --emit-stub-syms
7458 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7459 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7460
7461 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7462 @kindex --dotsyms
7463 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7464 @item --dotsyms
7465 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7466 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7467 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7468 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7469 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7470 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7471 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7472 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7473 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7474 feature.
7475
7476 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7477 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7478 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7479 @item --save-restore-funcs
7480 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7481 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7482 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7483 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7484 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7485 link.
7486
7487 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7488 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7489 @item --no-tls-optimize
7490 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7491 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7492 disable the optimization.
7493
7494 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7495 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7496 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7497 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7498 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7499 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7500 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7501 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7502 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7503 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7504 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7505 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7506 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7507 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7508 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7509
7510 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7511 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7512 @item --no-opd-optimize
7513 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7514 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7515 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7516 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7517
7518 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7519 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7520 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7521 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7522 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7523 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7524 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7525
7526 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7527 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7528 @item --no-toc-optimize
7529 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7530 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7531 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7532 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7533 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7534 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7535 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7536 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7537 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7538 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7539 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7540 optimization.
7541
7542 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7543 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7544 @item --no-multi-toc
7545 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7546 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7547 where TOC
7548 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7549 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7550 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7551 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7552 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7553 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7554 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7555 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7556
7557 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7558 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7559 @item --no-toc-sort
7560 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7561 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7562 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7563 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7564 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7565 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7566 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7567 off this feature.
7568
7569 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7570 @kindex --plt-align
7571 @kindex --no-plt-align
7572 @item --plt-align
7573 @itemx --no-plt-align
7574 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7575 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7576 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7577 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7578 stubs are packed tightly.
7579
7580 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7581 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7582 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7583 @item --plt-static-chain
7584 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7585 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7586 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7587 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7588
7589 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7590 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7591 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7592 @item --plt-thread-safe
7593 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7594 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7595 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7596 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7597 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7598 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7599 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7600 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7601 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7602 default behaviour.
7603 @end table
7604
7605 @ifclear GENERIC
7606 @lowersections
7607 @end ifclear
7608 @end ifset
7609
7610 @ifset S/390
7611 @ifclear GENERIC
7612 @raisesections
7613 @end ifclear
7614
7615 @node S/390 ELF
7616 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7617
7618 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7619 @table @option
7620
7621 @cindex S/390
7622 @kindex --s390-pgste
7623 @item --s390-pgste
7624 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7625 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7626 binaries marked that way.
7627 @end table
7628
7629 @ifclear GENERIC
7630 @lowersections
7631 @end ifclear
7632 @end ifset
7633
7634 @ifset SPU
7635 @ifclear GENERIC
7636 @raisesections
7637 @end ifclear
7638
7639 @node SPU ELF
7640 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7641
7642 @cindex SPU ELF options
7643 @table @option
7644
7645 @cindex SPU plugins
7646 @kindex --plugin
7647 @item --plugin
7648 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7649
7650 @cindex SPU overlays
7651 @kindex --no-overlays
7652 @item --no-overlays
7653 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7654 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7655 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7656 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7657
7658 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7659 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7660 @item --emit-stub-syms
7661 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7662 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7663
7664 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7665 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7666 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7667 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7668 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7669 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7670
7671 @cindex SPU local store size
7672 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7673 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7674 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7675 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7676 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7677
7678 @cindex SPU
7679 @kindex --stack-analysis
7680 @item --stack-analysis
7681 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7682 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7683 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7684 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7685 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7686 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7687 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7688 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7689 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7690 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7691 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7692 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7693 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7694 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7695 and calls will be given.
7696
7697 @cindex SPU
7698 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7699 @item --emit-stack-syms
7700 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7701 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7702 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7703 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7704 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7705 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7706 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7707 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7708 @end table
7709
7710 @ifclear GENERIC
7711 @lowersections
7712 @end ifclear
7713 @end ifset
7714
7715 @ifset TICOFF
7716 @ifclear GENERIC
7717 @raisesections
7718 @end ifclear
7719
7720 @node TI COFF
7721 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7722 @cindex TI COFF versions
7723 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7724 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7725 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7726 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7727 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7728 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7729
7730 @ifclear GENERIC
7731 @lowersections
7732 @end ifclear
7733 @end ifset
7734
7735 @ifset WIN32
7736 @ifclear GENERIC
7737 @raisesections
7738 @end ifclear
7739
7740 @node WIN32
7741 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7742
7743 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7744 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7745 command line options mentioned here.
7746
7747 @table @emph
7748 @cindex import libraries
7749 @item import libraries
7750 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7751 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7752 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7753 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7754 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7755 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7756
7757 @item exporting DLL symbols
7758 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7759 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7760
7761 @table @emph
7762 @item using auto-export functionality
7763 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7764 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7765 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7766
7767 @itemize
7768 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7769 @item --exclude-symbols
7770 @item --exclude-libs
7771 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7772 @item --version-script
7773 @end itemize
7774
7775 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7776 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7777 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7778 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7779 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7780 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7781 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7782 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7783
7784 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7785 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7786 if either of the following are true:
7787
7788 @itemize
7789 @item A DEF file is used.
7790 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7791 @end itemize
7792
7793 @item using a DEF file
7794 @cindex using a DEF file
7795 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7796 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7797 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7798 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7799 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7800
7801 @example
7802 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7803 @end example
7804
7805 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7806 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7807
7808 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7809
7810 @example
7811 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7812
7813 EXPORTS
7814 foo
7815 bar
7816 _bar = bar
7817 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7818 var1 DATA
7819 doo = foo == foo2
7820 eoo DATA == var1
7821 @end example
7822
7823 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7824 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7825 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7826 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7827 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7828 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7829 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7830 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7831 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7832
7833 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7834 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7835 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7836
7837 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7838 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7839 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7840 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7841
7842 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7843 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7844 non-default base address for the image.
7845
7846 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7847 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7848 filename specified on the command line.
7849
7850 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7851
7852 @example
7853 EXPORTS
7854 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7855 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7856 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7857 @end example
7858
7859 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7860 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7861 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7862 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7863 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7864 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7865 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7866
7867 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7868
7869 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7870 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7871 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7872 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7873 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7874
7875 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7876 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7877 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7878 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7879
7880 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7881 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7882 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7883 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7884 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7885 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7886 application will behave unexpectedly.
7887
7888 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7889 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7890 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7891 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7892 the DLL without an import library.
7893
7894 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7895 other DEF file statements
7896
7897 @cindex creating a DEF file
7898 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7899 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7900
7901 @item Using decorations
7902 @cindex Using decorations
7903 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7904 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7905 declared as:
7906
7907 @example
7908 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7909 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7910 @end example
7911
7912 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7913 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7914 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7915 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7916
7917 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7918 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7919 instead:
7920
7921 @example
7922 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7923 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7924 @end example
7925
7926 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7927 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7928 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7929 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7930 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7931 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7932 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7933 information.
7934 @end table
7935
7936 @cindex automatic data imports
7937 @item automatic data imports
7938 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7939 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7940 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7941 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7942 code to these platforms, especially for large
7943 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7944 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7945 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7946 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7947 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7948 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7949 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7950 trigger the feature's use.
7951
7952 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7953 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7954
7955 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7956 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7957
7958 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7959 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7960 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7961 below.
7962
7963 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7964 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7965 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7966 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7967 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7968 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7969 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7970 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7971 references.
7972
7973 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7974 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7975 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7976 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7977 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7978 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7979 run without error on an older system.
7980
7981 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7982 enabled as needed.
7983
7984 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7985 @item direct linking to a dll
7986 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7987 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7988 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7989 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7990 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7991 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7992 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7993 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7994 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7995 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7996
7997 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7998 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7999 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8000 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8001 select the dll instead of an import library.
8002
8003
8004 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8005 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8006
8007 @example
8008 libxxx.dll.a
8009 xxx.dll.a
8010 libxxx.a
8011 xxx.lib
8012 cygxxx.dll (*)
8013 libxxx.dll
8014 xxx.dll
8015 @end example
8016
8017 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8018
8019 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8020 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8021 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8022 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8023 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8024
8025 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8026 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8027 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8028 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8029 could coexist on the same machine.
8030
8031 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8032 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8033 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8034
8035 @example
8036 bin/
8037 cygxxx.dll
8038 lib/
8039 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8040 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8041 @end example
8042
8043 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8044 done two ways:
8045
8046 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8047 @example
8048 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8049 @end example
8050
8051 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8052 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8053 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8054 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8055
8056 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8057 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8058 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8059 making the app/dll.
8060
8061 @example
8062 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8063 @end example
8064
8065 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8066
8067 @example
8068 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8069 @end example
8070
8071 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8072 perfectly legal
8073
8074 @example
8075 bin/
8076 cygxxx-5.dll
8077 lib/
8078 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8079 @end example
8080
8081 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8082 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8083 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8084
8085 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8086 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8087
8088 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8089 work with auto-imported data.
8090
8091 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8092 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8093 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8094 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8095 possible to do this without an import lib.
8096
8097 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8098 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8099 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8100 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8101
8102 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8103 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8104 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8105 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8106 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8107 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8108 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8109
8110 @item symbol aliasing
8111 @table @emph
8112 @item adding additional names
8113 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8114 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8115 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8116 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8117 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8118
8119 @example
8120 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8121
8122 EXPORTS
8123 foo
8124 _foo = foo
8125 @end example
8126
8127 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8128
8129 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8130 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8131
8132 @example
8133 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8134 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8135 @end example
8136
8137 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8138 symbols.
8139
8140 @item renaming symbols
8141 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8142 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8143 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8144 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8145 created). In the following example:
8146
8147 @example
8148 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8149
8150 EXPORTS
8151 _foo = foo
8152 @end example
8153
8154 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8155 @samp{_foo}.
8156 @end table
8157
8158 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8159 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8160 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8161 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8162 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8163 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8164 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8165 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8166 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8167 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8168 which is probably not what you wanted.
8169
8170 @cindex weak externals
8171 @item weak externals
8172 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8173 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8174 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8175 are three variants of weak externals:
8176 @itemize
8177 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8178 called lazy externals.
8179 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8180 This form is not presently implemented.
8181 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8182 implemented.
8183 @end itemize
8184 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8185 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8186 uses a default value.
8187
8188 @cindex aligned common symbols
8189 @item aligned common symbols
8190 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8191 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8192 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8193 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8194 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8195 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8196 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8197 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8198
8199 @end table
8200
8201 @ifclear GENERIC
8202 @lowersections
8203 @end ifclear
8204 @end ifset
8205
8206 @ifset XTENSA
8207 @ifclear GENERIC
8208 @raisesections
8209 @end ifclear
8210
8211 @node Xtensa
8212 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8213
8214 @cindex Xtensa processors
8215 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8216 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8217 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8218 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8219 example, with the command:
8220
8221 @smallexample
8222 SECTIONS
8223 @{
8224 .text : @{
8225 *(.literal .text)
8226 @}
8227 @}
8228 @end smallexample
8229
8230 @noindent
8231 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8232 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8233 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8234 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8235 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8236 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8237 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8238
8239 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8240 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8241 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8242 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8243 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8244 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8245 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8246 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8247 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8248 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8249 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8250 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8251
8252 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8253 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8254 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8255 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8256 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8257 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8258 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8259 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8260 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8261 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8262 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8263 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8264 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8265 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8266
8267 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8268 control the linker:
8269
8270 @cindex Xtensa options
8271 @table @option
8272 @item --size-opt
8273 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8274 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8275 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8276 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8277 preserve the correctness of the code.
8278 @end table
8279
8280 @ifclear GENERIC
8281 @lowersections
8282 @end ifclear
8283 @end ifset
8284
8285 @ifclear SingleFormat
8286 @node BFD
8287 @chapter BFD
8288
8289 @cindex back end
8290 @cindex object file management
8291 @cindex object formats available
8292 @kindex objdump -i
8293 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8294 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8295 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8296 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8297 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8298 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8299 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8300 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8301 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8302
8303 @cindex BFD requirements
8304 @cindex requirements for BFD
8305 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8306 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8307 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8308 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8309 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8310 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8311 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8312
8313 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8314 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8315 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8316 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8317
8318 @menu
8319 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8320 @end menu
8321
8322 @node BFD outline
8323 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8324 @cindex opening object files
8325 @include bfdsumm.texi
8326 @end ifclear
8327
8328 @node Reporting Bugs
8329 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8330 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8331 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8332
8333 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8334
8335 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8336 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8337 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8338 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8339 @command{ld}.
8340
8341 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8342 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8343
8344 @menu
8345 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8346 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8347 @end menu
8348
8349 @node Bug Criteria
8350 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8351 @cindex bug criteria
8352
8353 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8354
8355 @itemize @bullet
8356 @cindex fatal signal
8357 @cindex linker crash
8358 @cindex crash of linker
8359 @item
8360 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8361 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8362
8363 @cindex error on valid input
8364 @item
8365 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8366
8367 @cindex invalid input
8368 @item
8369 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8370 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8371 object files are correct.
8372
8373 @item
8374 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8375 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8376 @end itemize
8377
8378 @node Bug Reporting
8379 @section How to Report Bugs
8380 @cindex bug reports
8381 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8382
8383 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8384 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8385 recommend you contact that organization first.
8386
8387 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8388 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8389 distribution.
8390
8391 @ifset BUGURL
8392 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8393 @value{BUGURL}.
8394 @end ifset
8395
8396 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8397 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8398 fact or leave it out, state it!
8399
8400 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8401 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8402 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8403 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8404 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8405 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8406 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8407 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8408 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8409 and the most helpful.
8410
8411 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8412 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8413 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8414
8415 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8416 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8417 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8418 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8419
8420 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8421
8422 @itemize @bullet
8423 @item
8424 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8425 the @samp{--version} argument.
8426
8427 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8428 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8429
8430 @item
8431 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8432 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8433
8434 @item
8435 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8436 version number.
8437
8438 @item
8439 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8440 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8441
8442 @item
8443 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8444 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8445 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8446 sufficient.
8447
8448 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8449 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8450
8451 @item
8452 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8453 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8454 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8455 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8456 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8457 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8458 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8459 attachments are best.
8460
8461 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8462 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8463 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8464 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8465 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8466
8467 @item
8468 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8469 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8470
8471 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8472 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8473 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8474 a chance to make a mistake.
8475
8476 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8477 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8478 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8479 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8480 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8481 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8482 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8483 any conclusion from our observations.
8484
8485 @item
8486 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8487 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8488 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8489 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8490 context, not by line number.
8491
8492 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8493 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8494 @end itemize
8495
8496 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8497
8498 @itemize @bullet
8499 @item
8500 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8501
8502 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8503 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8504 changes will not affect it.
8505
8506 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8507 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8508 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8509 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8510
8511 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8512 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8513 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8514 less time, and so on.
8515
8516 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8517 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8518
8519 @item
8520 A patch for the bug.
8521
8522 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8523 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8524 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8525 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8526
8527 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8528 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8529 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8530 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8531 fixed.
8532
8533 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8534 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8535 help us to understand.
8536
8537 @item
8538 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8539
8540 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8541 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8542 @end itemize
8543
8544 @node MRI
8545 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8546 @cindex MRI compatibility
8547 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8548 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8549 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8550 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8551 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8552 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8553 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8554
8555 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8556 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8557 features to make use of them.
8558
8559 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8560 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8561
8562 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8563 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8564 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8565 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8566 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8567
8568 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8569
8570 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8571 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8572 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8573
8574 @table @code
8575 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8576 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8577 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8578 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8579 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8580 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8581 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8582 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8583 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8584 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8585 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8586
8587 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8588 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8589 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8590 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8591
8592 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8593
8594 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8595 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8596 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8597 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8598
8599 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8600 @item BASE @var{expression}
8601 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8602 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8603
8604 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8605 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8606 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8607 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8608
8609 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8610 @item END
8611 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8612
8613 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8614 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8615 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8616 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8617
8618 @enumerate
8619 @item
8620 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8621
8622 @item
8623 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8624
8625 @item
8626 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8627 @samp{COFF}
8628 @end enumerate
8629
8630 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8631 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8632 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8633 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8634
8635 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8636 same line, with no change in its effect.
8637
8638 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8639 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8640 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8641 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8642 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8643 command line.
8644
8645 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8646 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8647 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8648 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8649 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8650
8651 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8652 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8653 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8654 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8655 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8656 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8657 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8658 file, in the order specified.
8659
8660 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8661 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8662 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8663 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8664 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8665 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8666
8667 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8668 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8669 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8670 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8671 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8672 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8673 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8674 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8675 @end table
8676
8677 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8678 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8679 @include fdl.texi
8680
8681 @node LD Index
8682 @unnumbered LD Index
8683
8684 @printindex cp
8685
8686 @tex
8687 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8688 % meantime:
8689 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8690 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8691 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8692 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8693 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8694 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8695 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8696 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8697 \page\colophon
8698 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8699 @end tex
8700
8701 @bye
This page took 0.239731 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.